L-DALI User`s Manual

L-DALI User`s Manual
L-DALI

DALI Light Controller
User’s Manual
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
Contact
LOYTEC
Blumengasse 35
A-1170 Vienna
AUSTRIA/EUROPE
[email protected]
http://www.loytec.com
Version 2.0.1
Document 88077105
LOYTEC MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR IN ANY COMMUNICATION WITH YOU,
AND
LOYTEC SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS
PRODUCT IS NOT DESIGNED OR INTENDED FOR USE IN EQUIPMENT
INTENDED FOR SURGICAL IMPLANT INTO THE BODY OR OTHER
APPLICATIONS INTENDED TO SUPPORT OR SUSTAIN LIFE, FOR USE IN
FLIGHT CONTROL OR ENGINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT WITHIN AN
AIRCRAFT, OR FOR ANY OTHER APPLICATION IN WHICH IN THE FAILURE
OF SUCH PRODUCT COULD CREATE A SITUATION IN WHICH PERSONAL
INJURY OR DEATH MAY OCCUR. LOYTEC MAKES NO REPRESENTATION
AND OFFERS NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND REGARDING OF ANY
THIRDPARTY COMPONENTS MENTIONED IN THIS MANUAL.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without the prior written permission of LOYTEC.
LC3020, L-Chip, L-Core, L-DALI, L-GATE, L-INX, L-IOB, L-IP, LPA,
L-Proxy, L-Switch, L-Term, L-VIS, L-WEB, and ORION™ stack are
trademarks of LOYTEC electronics GmbH.
LonTalk®, LONWORKS®, Neuron®, LONMARK®, LonMaker®, i.LON®, and LNS® are
trademarks of Echelon Corporation registered in the United States and other countries.
L-DALI User’s Manual
3
LOYTEC
Contents
1 Introduction ................................................................................................ 11
1.1
Overview ............................................................................................................ 11
1.2
L-DALI Models ................................................................................................. 15
1.3
Scope................................................................................................................... 15
2 Quick-Start Guide ...................................................................................... 16
2.1
Hardware Installation ....................................................................................... 16
2.2
Configuration of IP Address ............................................................................ 17
2.2.1 IP Configuration via Console ................................................................... 17
2.2.2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface .................................................... 18
2.3
Configuration with PC Software (LDALI-3E10X only) ................................ 20
2.3.1 Connect to Device in Stand-Alone Mode................................................. 21
2.3.2 Scan DALI Channel ................................................................................. 22
2.3.3 Assign Lamps and Sensor to LONMARK Objects ..................................... 23
2.3.4 Grouping Lamps....................................................................................... 24
2.3.5 Calibrate Light Sensor.............................................................................. 24
2.3.6 Parameterize the Constant Light Controller ............................................. 26
2.3.7 Download Configuration .......................................................................... 26
2.4
Configuration using Web Interface ................................................................. 28
2.4.1 Scan DALI Channel ................................................................................. 28
2.4.2 Assign Lamps and Sensor to LONMARK/BACnet Objects ....................... 29
2.4.3 Grouping Lamps....................................................................................... 30
2.4.4 Calibrate Light Sensor.............................................................................. 31
2.4.5 Parameterize the Constant Light Controller ............................................. 31
2.5
Configuration with CEA-709 Network Management Tool (LDALI-3E10X
only) .................................................................................................................... 32
2.6
Configuration of BACnet Interface (LDALI-ME20X only) .......................... 33
2.6.1 Configure BACnet Interface .................................................................... 33
2.6.2 Set up Constant Light Controller ............................................................. 33
3 Hardware Installation ............................................................................... 35
3.1
Enclosure............................................................................................................ 35
3.1.1 L-DALI..................................................................................................... 35
3.2
Product Label .................................................................................................... 35
3.3
Mounting ............................................................................................................ 36
3.4
LED signals ........................................................................................................ 36
3.4.1 Power LED ............................................................................................... 36
3.4.2 Status LED ............................................................................................... 36
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
4
LOYTEC
3.4.3 FT Activity LED (LDALI-3E10X only) .................................................. 36
3.4.4 MSTP Activity LED (LDALI-ME20X only) ........................................... 36
3.4.5 Ethernet Link LED .................................................................................. 37
3.4.6 Ethernet Activity LED ............................................................................. 37
3.4.7 Ethernet Config LED ............................................................................... 37
3.4.8 CN/IP LED .............................................................................................. 37
3.4.9 DALI Activity LEDs ................................................................................ 38
3.4.10 Wink Action (LDALI-3E10X only) ......................................................... 38
3.5
Buttons ............................................................................................................... 38
3.5.1 Status Button ........................................................................................... 38
3.5.2 DALI Mode Button.................................................................................. 38
3.5.3 DALI Channel Button.............................................................................. 39
3.5.4 DALI Program Button ............................................................................. 39
3.6
DIP Switch Settings .......................................................................................... 39
3.7
Terminal Layout and Power Supply ............................................................... 40
3.8
Wiring ................................................................................................................ 41
3.8.1 LDALI-ME20X ....................................................................................... 41
3.8.2 LDALI-3E10X ......................................................................................... 41
4 Web Interface ............................................................................................. 42
4.1
Device Information and Account Management .............................................. 42
4.2
Device Configuration ........................................................................................ 44
4.2.1 System Configuration .............................................................................. 44
4.2.2 Backup and Restore ................................................................................. 45
4.2.3 Port Configuration ................................................................................... 46
4.2.4 IP Configuration ...................................................................................... 47
4.2.5 CEA-709 Configuration (LDALI-3E10X only) ....................................... 48
4.2.6 CEA-852 Device Configuration (LDALI-3E10X only) ........................... 48
4.2.7 BACnet Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only)........................................ 50
4.2.8 BACnet/IP Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only) ................................... 50
4.2.9 MS/TP Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only) ......................................... 51
4.2.10 E-Mail Configuration .............................................................................. 52
4.2.11 DALI Installation ..................................................................................... 53
4.2.12 DALI Groups ........................................................................................... 59
4.2.13 Data Points .............................................................................................. 59
4.2.14 Trend ....................................................................................................... 62
4.2.15 Scheduler ................................................................................................. 62
4.2.16 Calendar .................................................................................................. 64
4.2.17 Alarm ....................................................................................................... 65
4.2.18 Debug ...................................................................................................... 66
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
4.3
5
LOYTEC
Device Statistics ................................................................................................. 67
4.3.1 System Log............................................................................................... 67
4.3.2 IP Statistics .............................................................................................. 68
4.3.3 CEA-852 Statistics (LDALI-3E10X only) ............................................... 68
4.3.4 Enhanced Communications Test (LDALI-3E10X only) .......................... 69
4.3.5 CEA-709 Statistics (LDALI-3E10X only) ............................................... 70
4.3.6 BACnet MS/TP Statistics (LDALI-ME20X only).................................... 71
4.3.7 DALI Statistics ......................................................................................... 72
4.3.8 Scheduler Statistics Page ......................................................................... 73
4.3.9 Alarm Log Page........................................................................................ 73
4.4
Reset, Contact, Logout ...................................................................................... 74
5 Concepts ...................................................................................................... 75
5.1
Alarming ............................................................................................................ 75
5.2
Historical Alarm Log ........................................................................................ 75
5.3
Scheduling .......................................................................................................... 76
5.4
Trending ............................................................................................................. 78
5.5
E-Mail................................................................................................................. 79
6 The L-DALI Configurator (LDALI-3E10X only)................................... 80
6.1
Installation ......................................................................................................... 80
6.1.1 Software Installation ................................................................................ 80
6.1.2 Registration as a Plug-In .......................................................................... 81
6.1.3 Operating Modes ...................................................................................... 83
6.2
Workflows for the L-DALI ............................................................................... 83
6.2.1 Involved Configuration Files.................................................................... 83
6.2.2 On-Line .................................................................................................... 83
6.2.3 Off-Line ................................................................................................... 84
6.2.4 Replace an L-DALI .................................................................................. 85
6.2.5 Using non-standard network interface ..................................................... 86
6.3
Adding L-DALI ................................................................................................. 86
6.4
Replace an L-DALI ........................................................................................... 89
6.5
Working with Configuration Properties ......................................................... 92
6.6
Enable Legacy NM Mode ................................................................................. 94
6.7
Using the L-DALI Configurator ...................................................................... 94
6.7.1 Starting as an LNS Plug-In ....................................................................... 94
6.7.2 Starting Stand-Alone ................................................................................ 94
6.7.3 Uploading the Configuration ................................................................... 95
6.7.4 Configuration Download .......................................................................... 96
6.7.5 Upload the System Log ............................................................................ 99
6.7.6 Backup and Restore ............................................................................... 100
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
6.8
6
LOYTEC
DALI Installation ............................................................................................ 100
6.8.1 DALI Installation Tab ............................................................................ 100
6.8.2 DALI Groups Tab .................................................................................. 103
6.8.3 DALI Channels Tab ............................................................................... 104
6.9
Parameter Configuration ............................................................................... 104
6.9.1 Reset Run Hours and Energy Count ...................................................... 105
6.9.2 Calibrate Light Sensor ........................................................................... 106
6.9.3 Calibrate Constant Light Controller ...................................................... 106
6.9.4 Modify Sunblind Controller Event Priorities ......................................... 107
6.9.5 Link Sunblind Controller to Constant Light Controller ......................... 108
6.9.6 Configure Emergency Light Auto-Test Calendar .................................. 108
6.10
Data Point Manager ....................................................................................... 109
6.10.1 Folder List ............................................................................................. 109
6.10.2 Network Port Folders ............................................................................. 110
6.10.3 Data Point List ....................................................................................... 110
6.10.4 Property View ........................................................................................ 111
6.10.5 User Registers ........................................................................................ 112
6.11
E-Mail Templates............................................................................................ 113
6.11.1 Create an E-Mail Template .................................................................... 113
6.11.2 Trigger E-Mails ..................................................................................... 114
6.11.3 Attachments ........................................................................................... 115
6.11.4 Limit E-Mail Send Rate......................................................................... 116
6.12
Local Schedule and Calendar ........................................................................ 116
6.12.1 Create a local Calendar .......................................................................... 116
6.12.2 Create Calendar Pattern ......................................................................... 117
6.12.3 Create a Local Scheduler ....................................................................... 117
6.12.4 Configure Scheduled Data Points .......................................................... 118
6.12.5 Configure Daily Schedules .................................................................... 119
6.12.6 Configure Exception Days ..................................................................... 121
6.12.7 Configure Embedded Exceptions .......................................................... 122
6.12.8 Configure Control Data Points .............................................................. 122
6.12.9 Using the Local Scheduler ..................................................................... 123
6.12.10
6.13
Limitations for Local CEA-709 Schedulers...................................... 123
Local Alarming ............................................................................................... 123
6.13.1 Create an Alarm Condition .................................................................... 123
6.13.2 Deliver Alarms via E-Mail..................................................................... 126
6.13.3 Create an Alarm Log.............................................................................. 126
6.13.4 Limitations for CEA-709 Alarm Servers ............................................... 127
6.14
Version 2.0.1
Local Trending................................................................................................ 127
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7
LOYTEC
6.14.1 Create a Local Trend .............................................................................. 127
6.14.2 Configure Trended Data Points .............................................................. 129
6.14.3 Trend Triggers ........................................................................................ 130
6.14.4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format ................................................... 130
6.14.5 Deliver Trend Data via E-Mail ............................................................... 131
6.14.6 Limitations for Local CEA-709 Trends.................................................. 131
6.15
Math Objects ................................................................................................... 132
6.15.1 Create a Math Object ............................................................................. 132
6.15.2 Editing a Math Object ............................................................................ 133
6.16
Project Settings ................................................................................................ 133
6.16.1 General ................................................................................................... 134
6.16.2 CEA-709 Settings .................................................................................. 134
6.16.3 CEA-709 AST Settings .......................................................................... 135
6.16.4 System Settings ...................................................................................... 136
7 Operating Interfaces ................................................................................ 138
7.1
Common Interface ........................................................................................... 138
7.1.1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files ......................................................... 138
7.1.2 Trend Log CSV File ............................................................................... 138
7.1.3 Alarm Log CSV File .............................................................................. 140
7.1.4 Emergency Light Test Log CSV File ..................................................... 140
7.2
CEA-709 Interface (LDALI-3E10X only) ..................................................... 140
7.2.1 Node Object #0000 ................................................................................ 141
7.2.2 Real-Time Keeper Object #3300 ............................................................ 141
7.2.3 Calendar Object #0006 .......................................................................... 141
7.2.4 Scheduler Object #0007 ......................................................................... 141
7.2.5 Lamp actuator Object #3040 .................................................................. 142
7.2.6 Light Sensor Object #1010 .................................................................... 162
7.2.7 Occupancy Sensor Object #1060 ........................................................... 164
7.2.8 Constant Light Controller Object #3050 ................................................ 166
7.2.9 Sunblind Controller Object #6111 ......................................................... 180
7.2.10 Globals #0005 ........................................................................................ 199
7.3
BACnet Interface (LDALI-ME20X only) ...................................................... 206
7.3.1 Interface Version .................................................................................... 207
7.3.2 Device Object......................................................................................... 207
7.3.3 Light Output Objects.............................................................................. 213
7.3.4 Sensor Objects ....................................................................................... 232
7.3.5 Constant Light Controller ...................................................................... 235
7.3.6 Alarming, Scheduling and Trending Objects (AST) .............................. 242
7.3.7 Client Mapping CSV File ...................................................................... 242
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
8
LOYTEC
7.3.8 EDE Export of BACnet Objects ............................................................ 243
7.4
DALI Interface ................................................................................................ 243
7.4.1 Multi-Master Operation ......................................................................... 243
7.4.2 DALI Device Types ............................................................................... 244
7.4.3 DALI Channel Bridging ........................................................................ 245
7.4.4 Special Use Cases .................................................................................. 245
8 Network Media ......................................................................................... 246
8.1
FT (LDALI-3E10X only) ................................................................................ 246
8.2
MS/TP (LDALI-ME20X only) ....................................................................... 247
9 L-DALI Firmware Update ...................................................................... 248
9.1
Firmware Update via the L-DALI Configurator (LDALI-3E10X only) .... 248
9.2
Firmware Update via FTP ............................................................................. 250
9.3
Firmware Update via the Console ................................................................. 250
10 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 253
10.1
Technical Support........................................................................................... 253
10.2
Statistics on the Console ................................................................................. 253
10.2.1 Connecting to the Console..................................................................... 253
10.2.2 Reset configuration (load factory defaults) ............................................ 254
10.2.3 Device Statistics Menu .......................................................................... 254
10.3
DALI Protocol Analyzer ................................................................................ 256
10.3.1 Starting DALI PA via Console .............................................................. 256
10.3.2 Starting DALI PA via Telnet ................................................................. 256
10.3.3 DALI PA Information ............................................................................ 257
11 Specifications ............................................................................................ 258
11.1
L-DALI ............................................................................................................ 258
11.1.1 Physical Specifications .......................................................................... 258
11.1.2 Resource Limits (LDALI-3E10X) ......................................................... 258
12 Revision History ....................................................................................... 259
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
9
LOYTEC
Abbreviations
100BaseT ............................ 100 Mbps Ethernet network with RJ-45 plug
Aggregation ......................... Collection of several CEA-709 packets into a single CEA-852
packet
AST ..................................... Alarming, Scheduling, Trending
BACnet ............................... Building Automation and Control Network
CC ....................................... Configuration Client, also known as CN/IP Device
CEA-709 ............................. Protocol standard for LONWORKS networks
CEA-852 ............................. Protocol standard for tunneling CEA-709 packets over IP
channels
CN ....................................... Control Network
CN/IP .................................. Control Network over IP
CN/IP Channel .................... logical IP channels that tunnels CEA-709 packets according
CEA-852
CN/IP packet ....................... IP packet that tunnels one or multiple CEA-709 packet(s)
COV .................................... change-of-value
CR ....................................... Channel Routing
CS........................................ Configuration Server that manages CEA-852 IP devices
DA ....................................... Data Access
DALI ................................... Digital Addressable Lighting Interface, see IEC 62386
DHCP .................................. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, RFC 2131, RFC 2132
DL ....................................... Data Logger, Datenlogger (Webservice)
DNS..................................... Domain Name Server, RFC 1034
DST ..................................... Daylight Saving Time
GMT .................................... Greenwich Mean Time
IP ......................................... Internet Protocol
LSD Tool ............................. LOYTEC System Diagnostics Tool
IP-852 .................................. Logical IP-Channel, for tunneling CEA-709 packets according
to CEA-852
LSD Tool ............................. LOYTEC System Diagnostics Tool
MAC ................................... Media Access Control
MD5 .................................... Message Digest 5, a secure hash function, see Internet RFC
1321
MS/TP ................................. Master/Slave Token Passing (this is a BACnet data link layer)
NAT .................................... Network Address Translation, see Internet RFC 1631
NV ....................................... Network Variable
OPC ..................................... Open Process Control
RNI...................................... Remote Network Interface
RTT ..................................... Round-Trip Time
RTU..................................... Remote Terminal Unit
SL ........................................ Send List
SMTP .................................. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNTP ................................... Simple Network Time Protocol
SNVT .................................. Standard Network Variable Type
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
10
LOYTEC
SSL ..................................... Secure Socket Layer
TLS ..................................... Transport Layer Security
UI ........................................ User Interface
UNVT ................................. User-Defined Network Variable Type
UTC .................................... Universal Time Coordinated
XML ................................... eXtensible Markup Language
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
11
LOYTEC
1 Introduction
1.1 Overview
The L-DALI controllers for LONMARK (LDALI-3E10X) and BACnet
(LDALI-ME20X) are DALI gateways with built-in light controller functionality.
systems
DALI (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) is defined in the international standard IEC
60929 Annex E and the newer IEC 62386. It is used to dim and switch luminaries from
most leading manufacturers. DALI also supports devices like multi-sensors (e.g. for
brightness, occupancy, etc.) and intelligent switches.
Figure 1: L-DALI supports up to four DALI channels
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
12
LOYTEC
The L-DALI lineup features 1, 2, or 4 independent DALI channels. Up to 64 DALI-based
luminaries per DALI channel can be controlled individually or via 16 groups. All luminaries
are monitored for lamp defect. L-DALI can provide this information to the Building
Management System (BMS) through its NV or BACnet interface respectively. For
CEA-709 communication IP-852 (Ethernet/IP) and TP/FT-10 are supported, for BACnet
communication BACnet/IP and BACnet MS/TP are supported.
LDALI-3E101, LDALI-3E102, and LDALI-3E104 are gateways connecting a DALI
network to a CEA-709 network, LDALI-ME204 is a gateway connecting a DALI network to
a BACnet network. On the DALI network the L-DALI controller represents a DALI master
controller. On the CEA-709 or BACnet network the L-DALI controller offers a NV interface
or a BACnet server objects respectively to control the ballasts and the sensors connected for
the DALI network.
The constant light controller (LONMARK functional profile #3050, BACnet Loop object)
allows controlling DALI ballasts with lighting nodes on the CEA-709 or BACnet network.
On the LDALI-3E10X (LONMARK) version a built-in sunblind controller (LONMARK
functional profile #6111) interacts with other nodes on the CEA-709 network. Interaction
between the sunblind and constant light controller applications allows adjusting sunblinds
depending on the constant light controller output, e.g. for energy saving concepts.
L-DALI supports automation functions such as alarming, scheduling, and trending. The
L-DALI controllers offer local scheduling services including the possibility to configure
several local and remote 24 hour schedulers through the Web UI. Alarming includes the
functionality to generate, deliver, acknowledge, and display alarm conditions and logs
regardless whether the condition comes from the DALI or the CEA-709/BACnet network.
The trending capability includes periodic and event triggered data logging of values and
time stamps. Alarms and trend data are stored on the device accessible via an FTP
connection as CSV files.
Figure 2: Using L-DALI together with the L-WEB product family
L-DALI devices can be integrated with LWEB-801 Server using OPC XML-DA to save
trend and log files for long term storage. In addition, the optional LWEB-820 Master
Schedule Configurator gives the ability for remotely managing schedulers and calendars.
LWEB-830 Dream Report is used to analyze data and generate reports. L-DALI supports
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
13
LOYTEC
event-driven E-Mail notification as a result of a predefined action triggered by a specific
status or an exceeded high limit. E-Mail notification can also be used to forward trend and
log files to central SQL databases for long term storage (see LWEB-801 for details).
L-DALI supports common mathematical operations and functions, as well as Boolean
expressions.
Some lighting controller applications do not need a connection to the CEA-709 or BACnet
network. Therefore the L-DALI controller can control a DALI network as a standalone
device with the aid of the supported automation functions (alarming, scheduling, and
trending). Connected to an IP network, remote access allows to set parameters and to read
the system status.
The complete configuration can be done through the built-in Web server. The
commissioning and maintenance of the DALI system can be done using a standard Web
browser on a PC. The configuration can also be done via a PC based configuration software
(LDALI-3E10X only).
The L-DALI offers the following features:
Version 2.0.1

DALI gateway and controller

Supports 1, 2, or 4 DALI channels (dependent on model)

Direct control of up to 64 DALI devices per DALI channel

Direct control of up to 16 DALI groups per DALI channel

Scene control for up to 16 groups and one broadcast scene per DALI channel

Detect lamp and ballast failure on DALI luminaries and signals

Simple replacement of (broken) DALI devices (no configuration tool required)

DALI Multi-Master capable

Built-in DALI protocol analyzer

Supports Alarming, Scheduling, and Trending (AST™)

Supports common mathematical operations and functions as well as Boolean
expressions

Supports event-driven E-Mail notification

Supports periodic testing of emergency lights

Supports lamp burn-in mode

Support calculation of energy consumption and run-hours

Configuration via Web interface

Firmware update via serial, CEA-709, or Ethernet port

Operating Voltage: 12-35 V DC or 12-24 V AC

157 x 86 x 60 (L x B x H in mm) or 9 TE
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual

14
LOYTEC
DIN rail mountable
LDALI-3E10X (LONMARK, CEA-709) only:

Fully compliant with CEA-709, CEA-852, and EN 14908 standard

Supports LONMARK TP/FT-10 or CEA-852 Ethernet (IP-852) channels (selectable)

Control of DALI capable ballasts via NVs

Retrieve information from DALI capable sensors via NVs

Supports LONMARK Functional Profiles:
o
Lamp Actuator #3040
o
Light Sensor #1010
o
Occupancy Sensor #1060
o
Constant Light Controller #3050
o
Sunblind Controller #6111
o
Scheduler #0007
o
Calendar #0006
LDALI-ME20X (BACnet) only:
Version 2.0.1

Fully compliant with BACnet standard ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2008

Supports BACnet/IP or BACnet MS/TP (selectable)

Control of DALI capable ballasts and sensors via BACnet server objects

Retrieve information from DALI capable sensors via BACnet server objects

BACnet client functionality (configurable)

Supports the following BACnet server objects:
o
Analog Output objects to control DALI ballasts, groups, and channels
o
Multi-State Output objects for scene control of DALI groups and channels
o
Analog Input objects providing feedback from DALI ballast, groups, and
channels
o
Analog Input objects providing status information from DALI groups and
channels
o
Accumulator objects providing estimated energy usage of DALI groups and
channels
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
15
LOYTEC
o
Analog Input object providing lux level information from supported DALI
sensors
o
Binary Input objects providing occupancy information from supported DALI
sensors
o
Loop objects providing constant light controller functionality
1.2 L-DALI Models
This Section provides an overview of the different L-DALI models in Table 1. This table
identifies the different features of the L-DALI models. Models that possess a certain feature
have a check mark () in the respective column. If a feature is not available in the
particular model, the column is left blank.
ME204
1
2
4
4
CEA-709 (FT)



CEA-852 (IP)



3E102
DALI channels
Features
3E101
3E104
L-DALI Model
BACnet MS/TP

BACnet IP

LDALI Configurator



Table 1: Available features in different L-DALI models
1.3 Scope
This document covers , LDALI-3E10X devices with firmware version 2.1, LDALI-ME204
devices with firmware version 2.2, and the L-DALI Configuration Software version 1.1.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
16
LOYTEC
2 Quick-Start Guide
This Chapter contains step-by-step instructions on how to configure the L-DALI for the
simple project shown in Figure 3.
The project consists of a single room (Room 306) which is illuminated by four DALI lamps.
Two of those lamps form a light band near the windows of the room and the other two
lamps form a light band near the corridor. The room is equipped with a DALI multi-sensor
which acts as both a light sensor and an occupancy sensor. The build-in constant light
controller of the L-DALI device uses the input from the DALI multi-sensor and dims the
DALI ballasts accordingly. The sunblind controller is not used in this quick-start example.
Figure 3: Quick-Start Example Project
2.1 Hardware Installation
It is recommended to use the LDALI-PWR4-U or LDALI-PWR2-U power supply together
with the L-DALI. Connect the L-DALI to the LDALI-PWR4-U and to the DALI network as
shown in Figure 4. To allow for easy configuration it is recommended to always connect the
L-DALI to the Ethernet network. More detailed instructions are given in Chapter 3.
Important:
Do not connect terminal 26 to earth ground!
After the DALI ballasts have been installed and connected to the DALI network, the
installation can be tested by following these steps:
1.
Version 2.0.1
Check that the DALI LEDs (“DALI x ACT”, where x is 1 to 4) do not light up red. If
one of these LEDs is red, check the proper connection of the bus power supply for the
corresponding channel.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
17
LOYTEC
2.
Press the DALI mode button (“ON/OFF/AUTO”) on the front panel of the L-DALI
once. Now all DALI ballasts should be switched on (maximum level) and the DALI
LEDs on the L-DALI should light up green.
3.
Press the DALI mode button again. Now all DALI ballasts should be switched off and
the DALI LEDs on the L-DALI should light up orange.
4.
Press the DALI mode button again. This should not change the state of the DALI
ballasts but return the L-DALI to the auto-mode (control via CEA-709/BACnet
interface).
Figure 4: Basic Hardware Installation.
2.2 Configuration of IP Address
The L-DALI can be configured via a console interface or via the Web interface. To
configure the L-DALI, the following steps have to be performed:
Note:
1.
Setup IP configuration (see Sections 2.2.1 and 2.2.2).
2.
Setup the DALI network (see Section 2.3).
This setup procedure assumes the use of the IP interface.
2.2.1 IP Configuration via Console
Use a PC terminal program with the communication settings set to 38,400 bps / 8 data bits /
no parity / 1 stop bit / no handshake. To connect COM1 of the PC to the Console on the
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
18
LOYTEC
device, use a standard null-modem cable with full handshaking. Power up the device or
press Return if the device is already running. The following menu should appear on the
terminal:
Device Main Menu
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Show device information
Serial firmware upgrade
System configuration
DALI maintenance
IP configuration
CEA-852 device configuration
CEA-709 configuration
Reset configuration (factory defaults)
Device statistics
[a] Data Points
[0] Reset device
Please choose:
Figure 5: Device Main Menu
Select ‘5’ from the device main menu and enter the IP address, netmask, and gateway
address. Note that you must use different IP addresses if you are using multiple IP devices
in your setup.
IP Configuration Menu
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[9]
[0]
[b]
DHCP
: disabled
IP Address
: 192.168.1.254
IP Netmask
: 255.255.255.0
IP Gateway
: 192.168.1.1
Hostname
: new
Domainname
: <unset>
DNS Servers
: <unset>
MAC Address
: 00:0A:B0:01:0C:9F (factory default)
NTP Servers
: <unset> (out-of-sync)
Link Speed & Duplex : Auto Detect
[q] Quit without saving
[x] Exit and save
Please choose:
Figure 6: Enter basic IP settings.
Press ‘x’ to save the IP settings and reset the device with the main menu item ‘0’ in order to
let the new IP settings take effect.
Important!
The default IP address 192.168.1.254 is only set for configuration access. It must be
changed in order to make the device functional.
2.2.2 IP Configuration via the Web Interface
As an alternative to the console interface the Web interface can be used to configure the
device. In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192.168.1.254 of the L-DALI. Note
that if your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192.168.1.xxx please open a
command tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the L-DALI.
To Add a Route to the Device
Version 2.0.1
1.
Windows START  Run
2.
Enter ‘cmd’ and click OK.
3.
In the command window enter the command line
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
19
LOYTEC
route add 192.168.1.254 %COMPUTERNAME%
In Windows7 replace %COMPUTERNAME% with the PC’s actual IP address.
4.
Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192.168.1.254.
Figure 7: Example Start Screen
5.
Click on Config in the left menu. You will be asked to enter the administrator
password in order to change the IP settings. Enter ‘loytec4u’ and select Login.
Figure 8: Enter ‘loytec4u’ as the default administrator password.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
20
LOYTEC
6.
The Config menu opens. Click on Port Config in the Config menu and select Ethernet
tab. Enter the IP address, the IP netmask, and IP gateway for this device as shown in
Figure 9.
7.
Press Save Settings and then reset the device by selecting Reset in the highlighted text.
This changes the IP settings of the device.
Figure 9: Enter IP address and gateway.
2.3 Configuration with PC Software (LDALI-3E10X only)
For the LDALI-3E10X family (CEA-709/LONMARK) a PC based configuration software –
the LDALI Configurator – is available. For the LDALI-ME20X family (BACnet) the web
interface can be used for configuration (see Section 2.4).
Install the L-DALI configuration software from the setup.exe. This file can be downloaded
from www.loytec.com. This tool can be used as a stand-alone tool or as LNS plug-in. To
show that the DALI installation can be done without an LNS database, we will use the
L-DALI configuration software as a stand-alone tool in this quick-start example.
A detailed description of the L-DALI configuration software can be found in Chapter 6.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
21
LOYTEC
Figure 10: L-DALI Configuration Software, Start
2.3.1 Connect to Device in Stand-Alone Mode
1.
Select the FTP connection method by clicking on the FTP connect button in the tool
bar as shown in Figure 11.
Figure 11: L-DALI Configuration Software, FTP Connect
Version 2.0.1
2.
In the FTP connection dialog (see Figure 12) enter the IP address of the L-DALI, the
user name and password. The default user is ‘admin’ and the default password is
‘loytec4u’ (older firmware versions used ‘admin’).
3.
Optionally, click on New and enter a user-defined name for this connection. That name
can be selected later to connect. Click on Save to store that connection.
4.
If your device is located behind a NAT router or firewall, you may change the FTP,
Telnet, and HTTP ports to your needs for accessing the device. Clicking Save also
stored these settings.
5.
Click on Connect. This establishes the connection to the device.
6.
The L-DALI configuration software asks if you want to upload the current
configuration of the device. You can cancel this dialog because in this quick-start we
configure the device from scratch.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
22
LOYTEC
Figure 12: L-DALI Configuration Software, FTP Connection Dialog
2.3.2 Scan DALI Channel
1.
Select the DALI channel and click on the Scan Channel button shown in Figure 13.
Figure 13: L-DALI Configuration Software, Scan Channel
2.
The L-DALI device scans the selected channel and displays all detected devices as
shown in Figure 14.
Figure 14: L-DALI Configuration Software, Detected DALI Devices
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
23
LOYTEC
2.3.3 Assign Lamps and Sensor to LONMARK Objects
1.
To identity which of the four detected DALI ballasts is which physical lamp, select one
and click the Wink button. The corresponding lamp blinks for the configured wink
duration.
Figure 15: L-DALI Configuration Software, Wink Button
2.
To assign an DALI ballast to a LONMARK object, select the ballast in the list of DALI
Devices and drag it to the desired position in the Lamp Actuator objects list on the
left side. You can change the names of the lamp actuator objects.
After you have assigned all lamps and changed the names the configuration should look
as shown in Figure 16.
Figure 16: L-DALI Configuration Software, Assigned Lamp Actuator Objects
3.
Version 2.0.1
To assign the DALI multi-sensor to a LONMARK object, select the sensor in the list of
DALI Devices and drag it to the desired position in the Light/Occupancy Sensor
objects list on the lower left side. After you have changed the names of the sensor
object the configuration should look as shown in Figure 17.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
24
LOYTEC
Figure 17: L-DALI Configuration Software, Assigned Light/Occupancy Sensor Object
2.3.4 Grouping Lamps
Lamps which are assigned to a group can be controlled together by the corresponding
LONMARK group object. We will create two groups: One for the lamps near the window and
one for the lamps near the corridor.
1.
In the L-DALI configuration software switch to the DALI Groups tab.
2.
Add the two lamps near the window to group 0 and the two lamps near the corridor to
group 1. Assign names to the groups as shown in Figure 18.
Figure 18: L-DALI Configuration Software, Group Configuration
2.3.5 Calibrate Light Sensor
The L-DALI device allows calibrating the light sensor under up to seven different light
conditions to counter any non-linearity of the sensor. However, in many cases it is enough
to calibrate the sensor with a single light condition which is near the setpoint. In this quickstart only one lux measurement is performed.
1.
Version 2.0.1
In the L-DALI configuration software switch to the Parameters tab.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
2.
25
LOYTEC
Select the light sensor index 0 and click on the Calibrate Light Sensor… button as
shown in Figure 19. The light sensor calibration window as shown in Figure 20 in
displayed.
Figure 19: Parameterize Light Sensor
3.
Measure the current lux level at the reference area (e.g. desk) using a luxmeter.
4.
Enter the measured lux level in the input field and select the index 0.
5.
Press the Calibrate button.
6.
Close the dialog by pressing the Done button.
Figure 20: Calibrate Light Sensor
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
26
LOYTEC
2.3.6 Parameterize the Constant Light Controller
1.
In the L-DALI configuration software switch to the Parameters tab.
2.
Select the constant light controller with index 0 as shown in Figure 21. The parameters
of the selected constant light controller are displayed in the lower half of the window.
3.
Change the parameter nciClMode to CL_MODE_REGULATOR. This parameter
selects the operating mode. The REGULATOR mode is used if a light/occupancy
sensor is installed which measures the indoor illumination.
4.
Change the setpoint of the constant light controller (nciLuxSetpoint) to 700.
5.
You can leave the default values for the remaining parameters. For a description of the
constant light controller functionality and the parameters refer to Section 7.2.8.
Figure 21: Parameterize Constant Light Controller
2.3.7 Download Configuration
1.
Version 2.0.1
To download the configuration into the L-DALI device click on the Download
Configuration button in the toolbar.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
27
LOYTEC
Figure 22: L-DALI Configuration Software, Download Configuration
2.
Because we have changed only the DALI configuration and the parameters it is
sufficient to check only DALI Configuration and Parameters in the following dialog.
This speeds up the download process.
Figure 23: L-DALI Configuration Software, Download DALI Configuration and Parameters
3.
Version 2.0.1
After the download is complete, the assigned DALI devices are displayed on a green
background (see Figure 24). The green background color indicates that the
communication with the device is OK. If there is a communication error, the device
will be displayed with a red background color.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
28
LOYTEC
Figure 24: L-DALI Configuration Software, After Configuration Download
2.4 Configuration using Web Interface
As an alternative to the LDALI Configurator PC Software the Web interface of the L-DALI
can be used. In a Web browser enter the IP address as set up in Section 2.2.
A detailed description of the L-DALI Web interface can be found in Chapter 4.
2.4.1 Scan DALI Channel
Version 2.0.1
1.
In the L-DALI Web interface click on Config in the left menu. If not already logged in
you will be asked to enter the administrator password. Enter ‘loytec4u’ and select
Login.
2.
The Config menu opens. Click on DALI Installation in the Config menu. The DALI
installation page opens as shown in Figure 25.
3.
Selected the DALI channel by clicking on the different tabs at the top of the page
labeled Channel 1, Channel 2, etc. and press the Rescan button.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
29
LOYTEC
Figure 25: DALI Installation Web Interface: Initial View
4.
The L-DALI scans the DALI channel and lists the detected devices under Scanned
Devices not in Database in the lower halve of the Web interface (see Figure 26).
Figure 26: DALI Installation Web Interface: Detected DALI Devices
2.4.2 Assign Lamps and Sensor to LONMARK/BACnet Objects
Version 2.0.1
1.
To identity which of the four detected DALI ballasts is which physical lamp, select one
and click the Wink button. The corresponding lamp blinks for the configured wink
duration.
2.
To assign an DALI ballast or sensor to a LONMARK or BACnet object, use the dropdown list available for each device in the Scanned Devices not in Database section
(left column). This list contains all available fieldbus objects. When you are done, press
the button Save Assignment. Alternatively to manual assignment press the button
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
30
LOYTEC
Auto Assign for random assignment. After you have assigned all lamps the
configuration should look as shown in Figure 27.
Figure 27: DALI Installation Web Interface: Device Assignment Done
2.4.3 Grouping Lamps
Lamps which are assigned to a group can be controlled together by the corresponding
LONMARK or BACnet group object. We will create two groups: One for the lamps near the
window and one for the lamps near the corridor.
1.
Click on DALI Groups in the Config menu. The DALI Groups page opens.
2.
Again, selected the DALI channel by clicking on the different tabs at the top of the
page labeled Channel 1, Channel 2, etc.
Figure 28: DALI Installation Web Interface: Group Configuration
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
3.
31
LOYTEC
Add the two lamps near the window to group 0 and the two lamps near the corridor to
group 1 by checking the corresponding check boxes. Press the Save button. The result
will look like in Figure 28.
2.4.4 Calibrate Light Sensor
The L-DALI device allows calibrating the light sensor under up to seven different light
conditions to counter any non-linearity of the sensor. However, in many cases it is enough
to calibrate the sensor with a single light condition which is near the setpoint. In this quickstart only one lux measurement is performed.
1.
Go to the DALI Installation page and press the Calibrate button next to the sensor that
is to be calibrated. The DALI sensor calibration page is shown in Figure 29.
Figure 29: DALI Installation Web Interface: Sensor Calibration
2.
Measure the current lux level at the reference area (e.g. desk) using a luxmeter.
3.
Enter the measured lux level in the input field and select index 0.
4.
Press the Calibrate button.
2.4.5 Parameterize the Constant Light Controller
1.
Go to the Data Points page and select the data point path of constant light controller
application instance 0.
BACnet
L-DALI:
/BACnet
Port/Datapoints/Channel
Controllers/Constant Light Controller 0/
CEA-709 L-DALI: /CEA709 DALI
Controllers/Constant Light Controller 0/
Channel
1/Constant
1/Datapoints/Constant
Light
Light
The page will look like in Figure 30.
2.
Version 2.0.1
The parameters of the selected constant light controller are displayed on the right side.
Change the constant light controller mode (parameter nciClMode or Mode) to
REGULATOR. This parameter selects the operating mode. The REGULATOR mode is
used if a light/occupancy sensor is installed which measures the indoor illumination.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
32
LOYTEC
Figure 30 DALI Installation Web Interface: Parameters
3.
Change the setpoint of the constant light controller (parameter nciLuxSetpoint or
Setpoint) to 700.
4.
Set the On_Hysteresis and the Off_Hysteresis to 5%, the Off_Delay to 300 seconds and
the Hold_Time to 600 seconds. You can leave the default values for the remaining
parameters. For a description of the constant light controller functionality and the
parameters refer to Section 7.2.8 (CEA-709) and 7.3.5 (BACnet).
2.5 Configuration with CEA-709 Network Management Tool
(LDALI-3E10X only)
Refer to Section 6.3 on how to add the L-DALI to your LonMaker drawing.
Per default the constant light controller is linked to the light sensor, occupancy sensor, and
group object with the same index. In our example the following default connections apply:

The network variable input nviLuxLevel of the constant light controller 0 is
connected to the network variable output nvoLuxLevel of the light sensor 0.

The network variable input nviOccup of the constant light controller 0 is connected
to the network variable output nvoOccup of the occupancy sensor 0.

The network variable output nvoLampValue of the constant light controller 0 is
connected to the network variable input nviGPValue of the group object 0.
We have to change the default connection of the nvoLampValue network variable. The
network variable nvoLampValue should control the light band near the corridor (group 1)
and the secondary output of the constant light controller (nvoLamp2Value) should control
the light band near the window (group 0). Therefore we need to do bindings as shown in
Figure 31.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
33
LOYTEC
Figure 31: Network Variable Bindings
To enable the constant light controller use the network variable input nviCLSetting of type
SNVT_setting. Set the .function part of this network variable input to SET_ON.
For a detailed description of the functionality and interfaces of the LONMARK objects refer
to Section 7.2.
2.6 Configuration of BACnet Interface (LDALI-ME20X only)
2.6.1 Configure BACnet Interface
To allow integrating the L-DALI to a BACnet network a network wide unique device ID
and device name must be configured. This is best done using the web interface:
1.
Similar to the configuration of the IP address connect to the L-DALI using your Internet
browser.
2.
Click on Config and then BACnet Config in the left menu.
Figure 32: BACnet Device Configuration.
3.
Enter a unique device ID and device name as shown in Figure 32.
For further details see Section 4.2.7.
2.6.2 Set up Constant Light Controller
As described in Section 7.3.5 the constant light controller applications are available via the
BACnet interface as Loop objects. To allow automatic retrieval of input values (occupancy,
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
34
LOYTEC
lux level) and automatic writing to outputs (light output) the following properties have to be
set up using a BACnet Operator Workstation (BOWS):
Version 2.0.1

Manipulated_Variable_Reference: Must be configured to write to light output
(typically Present_Value of Analog Output object controlling DALI group, see
Section 7.3.3.10).

Controlled_Variable_Reference: Must be configured to read from light sensor
(typically Present_Value of Analog Input object mapping to DALI lux level sensor,
see Section 7.3.4.2).

Occupancy_Variable_Reference (property ID 537): Must be configured to read
from occupancy sensor (typically Present_Value of Binary Input object mapping
to DALI occupancy sensor, see Section 7.3.4.3).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
35
LOYTEC
3 Hardware Installation
3.1 Enclosure
3.1.1 L-DALI
The L-DALI enclosure is 159 mm wide for DIN rail mounting, following DIN 43 880 (see
Figure 33).
Figure 33: L-DALI Enclosure (dimensions in mm)
3.2 Product Label
The product label on the side of the L-DALI contains the following information:

Version 2.0.1
Order number with bar-code (e.g. LDALI-3E104),
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
36
LOYTEC

serial number with bar-code (Ser#),

LDALI-3E10X only: unique node ID and virtual ID with bar-code for each DALI
channel (NID1, VID1, NID2, VID2, etc.),

Ethernet MAC ID with bar-code (MAC1).
Unless stated otherwise, all bar codes are encoded using “Code 128”. An additional label is
also supplied with the L-DALI for documentation purposes. A virtual ID (VID) is a Node ID
on the IP channel.
3.3 Mounting
The device comes prepared for mounting on DIN rails following DIN EN 50 022. The
device can be mounted in any position. However, an installation place with proper airflow
must be selected to ensure that the temperature of the L-DALI device does not exceed the
specified range (see Chapter 11).
3.4 LED signals
3.4.1 Power LED
The L-DALI power LED lights up green when power is supplied to terminals 24, 25, and 26.
3.4.2 Status LED
The L-DALI is equipped with a red status LED (see Figure 33). This LED is normally off.
During boot-up the status LED is used to signal error conditions (red). If the fall-back image
is executed the status LED flashes red once every second.
3.4.3 FT Activity LED (LDALI-3E10X only)
The FT port on the LDALI-3E10X has a three-color LED (green, red, and orange, see Figure
33). Table 2 shows different LED patterns of the port and their meaning.
Behavior
Description
GREEN flashing fast
Traffic
GREEN flashing at 1Hz
L-DALI is unconfigured
RED permanent
Port damaged
RED flashing fast
Traffic with high amount of errors
RED flashing at 1 Hz
(all ports)
Firmware image corrupt
Please upload new firmware
ORANGE permanent
Port disabled
Comment
e.g. using LSD Tool
Table 2: CEA-709 Activity LED Patterns
3.4.4 MSTP Activity LED (LDALI-ME20X only)
The MS/TP port on the LDALI-ME20X has a three-color MSTP Activity LED (see Figure
33). Table 3 shows the different LED patterns of the port and their meaning. A permanent
color reflects a state. Flicker is for 25 ms when there is activity on the MS/TP data link
layer.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
37
LOYTEC
Behavior
Description
Comment
GREEN permanently,
flicker off
Multi-Master, token ok, flicker when traffic
Normal condition on a multi-master
MS/TP network.
ORANGE flicker
Sole master, flicker when traffic
Normal condition on a single-master
MS/TP network.
RED permanent, flicker
GREEN
Token lost state, flicker when transmit
attempt
Cable might be broken.
RED flash fast
Transmission or receive errors
This indicates bad cabling.
Table 3: MS/TP Activity LED Patterns.
3.4.5 Ethernet Link LED
The Ethernet Link LED lights up green whenever an Ethernet cable is plugged-in and a
physical connection with a switch, hub, or PC can be established.
3.4.6 Ethernet Activity LED
The Ethernet Activity LED lights up green for 6 ms whenever a packet is transmitted or
received or when a collision is detected on the network cable.
3.4.7 Ethernet Config LED
Currently the Ethernet Config LED has no function.
3.4.8 CN/IP LED
On the LDALI-3E10X the CNIP LED is a three color LED that indicates different operating
states of the L-DALI’s CEA-852 device.
Green: The CEA-852 device is fully functional and all CEA-852 configuration data
(channel routing info, channel membership list, send list) are up-to-date.
Green flicker: If a valid CEA-709 packet is received or transmitted over the IP channel, the
CNIP LED turns off for 50 ms. Only valid CEA-709 IP packets sent to the IP address of the
L-DALI can be seen. Stale packets or packets not addressed to the L-DALI are not seen.
Yellow: The CEA-852 device is functional but some configuration data is not up-to-date
(device cannot contact configuration server but has configuration data saved in Flash
memory)
Red: The CEA-852 device is non-functional because it was rejected from the CEA-852 IP
channel or shut-down itself due to an internal error condition.
Off: The CEA-852 device is non-functional because it has not been started. This can be the
case if the L-DALI uses DHCP and it has not received a valid IP configuration (address)
from the DHCP server.
Flashing Red at 1 Hz: The CEA-852 device is non-functional because it is started but has
not been configured. Please add the device to a CEA-852 IP channel (register in
configuration server).
Flashing green or orange at 1 Hz: The L-DALI’s CEA-709 side of the gateway has not been
commissioned yet. The color indicates the CEA-852 IP channel status as described above.
On the LDALI-ME20X the CNIP LED reflects the status of the BACnet/IP communication.
It flashes green for 25 ms when BACnet packets are transmitted or received over the
BACnet/IP interface.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
38
LOYTEC
3.4.9 DALI Activity LEDs
Each DALI interface on the L-DALI has a three color LED (green, red and orange). Table 4
shows different LED patterns and their meaning.
Behavior
Description
GREEN flashing
Traffic
RED flashing fast
Traffic with errors
RED permanent
No bus power-supply/bus-power supply failed
ORANGE permanent
Manual override to off or interface is selected
GREEN permanent
Manual override to on
Table 4: DALI Activity LED patterns
3.4.10 Wink Action (LDALI-3E10X only)
If the L-DALI receives a wink command on any of its network ports, it shows a blink
pattern on the CEA-709 or CNIP activity LEDs and the DALI activity LEDs. The LEDs
turn green/orange/red (each 0.15 s). This pattern is repeated six times. After that, the
activity LED of the DALI channel corresponding to the CEA-709 node on which the wink
was received flashes orange six times. After that the L-DALI LEDs resume their normal
behavior.
3.5 Buttons
3.5.1 Status Button
The L-DALI is equipped with a status button (see Figure 33). When pressing the status
button shortly during normal operation of the L-DALI, it sends a “Service Pin Message” on
every active CEA-709 node or a BACnet “I Am” message on all active BACnet data link
layers respectively.
LDALI-3E10x only: Note that there is one CEA-709 node for each DALI channel and each
has its own unique node ID (“Neuron ID”). Pressing the status button longer than 2 seconds
will allow you to select the node to send out the “Service Pin Message” message: The DALI
port LED of the currently selected node will light up orange. After 2 seconds the next
available node will be selected. When the status button is released the “Service Pin
Message” is sent out on the currently selected node.
As an alternative to pressing the status button, a service pin message can be sent via the
Web interface (see Section 4.1).
The status button can also be used to switch the device back to factory default state. Press
the service button and power-cycle the device. Keep the button pressed until the port LEDs
illuminate orange permanently. Release the button within five seconds from that time on to
reset the device to factory defaults. Alternatively, the device can be switched back to factory
defaults over the console UI (see Section 10.2.2).
3.5.2 DALI Mode Button
The L-DALI is equipped with a DALI mode button (“ON/OFF/AUTO”, see Figure 33). It is
used to manually override the dim values of the attached DALI devices. Press it once and all
DALI devices on the selected channels are switched on (“on mode”), press it again and all
DALI devices on the selected channels are switched off (“off mode”), press it a third time
and the selected channels go back to “auto mode”.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
39
LOYTEC
In the “on mode” and “off mode” the dim levels of the DALI devices cannot be changed via
the CEA-709 interface (“manual override”). In the “auto mode” the dim level of the DALI
devices is controlled via the CEA-709 or BACnet interface respectively.
Channels are selected via the DALI Channel button (see Section 3.5.3). The current state of
a DALI channel can be determined based on the corresponding DALI Activity LED (see
Section 3.4.9).
The main purpose of the mode button is to test the wiring during installation of the DALI
system.
3.5.3 DALI Channel Button
The L-DALI is equipped with a DALI Channel button (“CHANNEL”, see Figure 33). It is
used to select a specific channel. All other functions which can be performed via the DALI
button interface (e.g. select DALI mode, see Section 3.5.2) are applied only to the selected
DALI channel(s).
By default all DALI channels are selected. If the DALI Channel button is pressed once the
first channel is selected and the corresponding DALI Activity LED lights up orange. Now
each time the button is pressed the next channel is selected. If the last DALI channel is
selected and the button is pressed once again, all DALI channels are selected. If no button is
pressed for more than 15 seconds, the current selection is canceled.
3.5.4 DALI Program Button
The L-DALI is equipped with a DALI Program button (“PROG”, see Figure 33). It is used
to replace a broken ballast. When the button is pressed, the L-DALI scans the selected DALI
channel for missing and unconfigured ballasts. If exactly one missing ballast and one
unconfigured ballast are found on a channel, the unconfigured ballast is used to replace the
missing ballast. That is, the unconfigured ballast is configured with the address and the
configuration parameters of the missing ballast. If multiple missing ballasts or multiple
unconfigured ballasts are found, the Web UI or L-DALI configuration software must be
used to replace the missing ballast(s) (see Section and 6.7.6).
During the replace operation, the DALI Activity LED of the corresponding channel lights
up orange. If the operation was successful, the LED lights up green for 0.5 seconds, if it
failed, the LED lights up red for 0.5 seconds.
Which channels are selected can be controlled via the DALI Channel button (see Section
3.5.3).
3.6 DIP Switch Settings
The DIP switch assignment for the L-DALI is shown in Table 5. Please leave all switches at
default state.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
40
LOYTEC
DIP Switch #
Function
Factory Default
1
Must be OFF
OFF
2
Must be OFF
OFF
3
Must be OFF
OFF
4
Must be OFF
OFF
5
Must be OFF
OFF
6
Must be OFF
OFF
7
Must be OFF
OFF
Table 5: DIP Switch Settings for L-DALI
3.7 Terminal Layout and Power Supply
The L-DALI provides screw terminals to connect to the network as well as to the power
supply. The screw terminals can be used for wires of a maximum thickness of 1.5
mm2/AWG12. The device can either be DC or AC powered.
Terminal
Function
13
Earth Ground
14, 15
CEA-709 A, B of FT-10 Channel Port
24
Earth Ground
25, 26
Power Supply 12-35 VDC or 12-24 VAC ± 10%
Do not connect terminal 26 to earth ground!
27, 28
DALI Channel 4
29, 30
DALI Channel 3
32, 33
DALI Channel 2
34, 35
DALI Channel 1
Table 6: LDALI-3E10X Terminals.
Terminal
Function
13
BACnet MS/TP / Modbus RS-485 Ground
14
BACnet MS/TP / Modbus RS-485 Non-Inverting Input
15
BACnet MS/TP / Modbus RS-485 Inverting Input
24
Earth Ground
25, 26
Power Supply 12-35 VDC or 12-24 VAC ± 10%
Do not connect terminal 26 to earth ground!
27, 28
DALI Channel 4
29, 30
DALI Channel 3
32, 33
DALI Channel 2
34, 35
DALI Channel 1
Table 7: LDALI-ME20X Terminals.
Note:
Version 2.0.1
The L-DALI does not provide the DALI bus power supply for any of the connected DALI
channels. Thus, on each DALI channel a proper external DALI bus power supply must be
provided. For this purpose LOYTEC recommends the use of LOYTEC’s DALI bus power
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
41
LOYTEC
supply LDALI-PWR4-U or LDALI-PWR2-U, which is capable of providing the DALI bus
power for the four or two DALI interfaces respectively. If some other DALI masters are
connected to the DALI channel, these devices might generate the DALI bus power
internally, in which case no additional bus power supply must be connected to this
channel.
3.8 Wiring
Connect the L-DALI to the LDALI-PWR4-U and to the DALI network as shown in Figure
4. For easy configuration, it is recommended to always connect the L-DALI to the Ethernet
network.
3.8.1 LDALI-ME20X
If BACnet over MS/TP is enabled, the MS/TP network segment must be properly
terminated with an LT-04 network terminator connected at each of the two ends of the
segment media.
2-wire
MS/TP
Important:
Power Supply
3-wire
MS/TP
Power Supply
E
t
h
e
(a)
(b)
r
Figure 34: Connecting the LDALI-ME20X: n(a) 2-wire MS/TP, (b) 3-wire MS/TP.
e
When using 2-wire MS/TP, earth ground mustt be connected to both terminal 24 and 25
(see Figure 34a). Never connect terminal 26 to earth ground!
3.8.2 LDALI-3E10X
The CEA-709 network segment connected to the L-DALI needs to be terminated according
to the rules found in the specification of the transceiver (see Section 8.1).
Important:
Version 2.0.1
When using shielded network cables, only one side of the cable should be connected to
earth ground. Thus, the shield must be connected to earth ground either at the L-DALI
terminals or somewhere else in the network.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
42
LOYTEC
4 Web Interface
The L-DALI comes with a built-in Web server and a Web interface to configure the device
and extract statistics information. The Web interface allows configuring the IP settings,
CEA-852 and CEA-709 settings, and managing the DALI devices. This interface is very
simple to use and has an intuitive, self-explanatory user interface.
4.1 Device Information and Account Management
In a Web browser enter the default IP address 192.168.1.254 of the L-DALI. Note that if
your PC has an IP address in a subnet other than 192.168.1.xxx you must open a command
tool and enter the following route command to add a route to the L-DALI:
To Add a Route to the Device
1.
Windows START  Run
2.
Enter ‘cmd’ and click Ok.
3.
In the command window enter the command line
route add 192.168.1.254 %COMPUTERNAME%
Version 2.0.1
4.
Then open your Web browser and type in the default IP address 192.168.1.254.
5.
The device information page should appear as shown in Figure 35.
6.
The device information page shows information about the L-DALI and the current
firmware version. It includes the unique node IDs (“Neuron IDs”) of the CEA-709
applications. The L-DALI has a separate CEA-709 application for each DALI channel.
7.
Figure 35 shows the device information page for a LDALI-3E104 which has four DALI
channels. In this example the CEA-709 protocol is enabled and the CEA-852
(CEA-709 over IP) protocol is disabled. Therefore the web page shows the four
applications CEA-709 Node 1, 2, 3, and 4 and displays their node IDs and program
IDs. This page can also be used to send the CEA-709 service pin messages. This is a
useful feature when commissioning the L-DALI, since it is not necessary to be on-site
to press the device’s status button. The applications IP Node 1, 2, 3, and 4 are inactive
because the CEA-852 protocol is disabled.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
43
LOYTEC
Figure 35: Device Information Page
Click through the menus on the left hand side to become familiar with the different screens.
If you click on Config in the left menu you will be asked to enter the administrator
password in order to make changes to the settings as shown in Figure 36. Enter the default
administrator password ‘loytec4u’ and select Login.
Figure 36: Enter ‘loytec4u’ as the default administrator password.
The Config menu opens. Click on Passwords in the Config menu, which opens the
password configuration page as shown in Figure 37. The L-DALI has three user accounts:
(1) guest allows the user to view certain information only, e.g., the device info page. By
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
44
LOYTEC
default the guest user has no password. (2) operator is able to read more sensible
information such as calendar data. (3) admin has full access to the L-DALI and can make
changes to its configuration. Note that the user accounts are also used to log on to the FTP
and Telnet server.
Figure 37: Password Configuration Screen
Please change the administrator password in order to protect yourself from unwanted
configuration changes by anyone else. To do so, select the admin account in the drop-down
box and enter the new password. If the administrator password is left empty, password
protection is turned off and everyone can access the L-DALI without entering a password.
Click on Change password to activate the change.
4.2 Device Configuration
The device configuration pages allow viewing and changing the device settings of the
L-DALI. Here are some general rules for setting IP addresses, port numbers, and time
values:

An empty IP address field disables the entry.

An empty port number field sets the default port number.

An empty time value field disables the time setting.
4.2.1 System Configuration
The system configuration page is shown in Figure 38. This page allows configuring the
device’s system time. The time sync source can be set to auto, manual, NTP, or LonMark.
In the auto mode, the device switches to the first external time source that is discovered.
Possible external time sources are NTP and LonMark. The option manual allows setting the
time manually in the fields Local Time and Local Date. In manual mode, the device does
not switch to an external time source. Note, that if NTP is selected, the NTP servers have to
be configured on the IP Configuration page (see Section 4.2.4).
The time zone offset must be defined independently of the time source. It is specified as the
offset to GMT in hours and minutes (e.g., Vienna/Austria is +01:00, New York/U.S.A. is
-06:00). For setting the daylight saving time (DST) pre-defined choices are offered for
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
45
LOYTEC
Europe and U.S.A./Canada. DST can be switched off completely by choosing none or set
manually for other regions. In that case, start and end date of DST must be entered in the
fields below.
Figure 38: System Configuration Page
The next section on the page allows configuring the earth position of the L-DALI. This
setting defines the longitude, latitude and elevation of the device. The latitude and longitude
are entered as degrees, minutes, and seconds. The altitude (or elevation) is entered in meters
from sea level. This setting is used for an astronomical clock. For fixed locations such as a
building, the position can be entered on this page. For moving locations, this setting can be
updated over the network using the network variable nciEarthPos (see Section 7.2.1).
The CSV delimiter specifies what character is used as delimiter when downloading a CSV
file (e.g. trend log file) from the L-DALI.
Enable the legacy mode if this is required by your network management tool (see Section
6.6, LDALI-3E10X only).
The BACnet interface version can be configured via the setting “Interface Version” (see
Section 7.3.1, LDALI-ME20X only).
4.2.2 Backup and Restore
A configuration backup of the L-DALI device can be downloaded via the Web interface.
Press the Backup/Restore link as shown in Figure 39 to start the download. The L-DALI
device assembles a single file including all required files. A file requestor dialog allows
specifying the location where the backup file shall be stored.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
46
LOYTEC
To restore the device settings, simply select a previously generated backup file in the
Restore Configuration section of the page by clicking the button next to the Filename
field. Then press the Restore button.
The backed up configuration data consists of:

Device settings (Passwords, IP settings, E-Mail config, etc.),

Data point configuration,

CEA-709 binding information,

AST settings,

Light and sunblind application parameters,

DALI configuration.
Figure 39: Backup/Restore page.
4.2.3 Port Configuration
This menu allows configuring the device’s communications ports. For each communication
port, which is available on the device and shown on the label (CEA-709, Ethernet), a
corresponding configuration tab is provided by the Web UI. An example is shown in Figure
40. Each port tab contains a selection of available communication protocols. By selecting a
checkbox or radio button the various protocols can be enabled or disabled on the
communication port. Some ports allow exclusive protocol activation only, other ports (e.g.,
the Ethernet port) allow multiple protocols bound to that port.
Figure 40: Port Configuration Page.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
47
LOYTEC
When selecting a protocol on a communication port, the protocol’s communication
parameters are displayed in a box on the right-hand side. To save the settings of the
currently opened protocol, click the Save Settings button. Pressing Get Settings retrieves
the current settings from the device.
4.2.4 IP Configuration
The TCP/IP configuration is done under the Ethernet port tab as shown in Figure 41. The
mandatory IP settings, which are needed to operate the device, are marked with a red
asterisk (IP address, netmask, gateway). The Enable DHCP checkbox switches between
manual entry of the IP address, netmask, and gateway address, and automatic configuration
from a DHCP server.
Hostname and Domainname are optional entries and can be left empty. For some DHCP
configurations it may be necessary to enter a hostname. Please contact your system
administrator on how to configure DHCP to acquire an IP address. Further, you can
configure up to 3 Domain Name Servers.
Figure 41: IP Configuration Page.
The device comes configured with a unique MAC address. This address can be changed in
order to clone the MAC address of another device. Please contact your system administrator
to avoid MAC address conflicts.
The device can be configured to synchronize its clock with NTP time. Enter the IP address
of a primary and, optionally, a secondary NTP server. The L-DALI will use NTP as a time
source if the time sync source in the system configuration page is set to NTP (see Section
4.2.1). The field NTP status below the NTP server settings displays the current NTP
synchronization status (out-of-sync, or in-sync).
If the device is operated with a 10 Mbit/s-only hub, the link speed should be switched from
Auto Detect to 10Mbps/Half-Duplex. With modern 100/10 Mbit/s switches, this setting
can be left at its default.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
48
LOYTEC
Other standard protocols that are bound to the Ethernet interface are FTP, Telnet, and HTTP
(Web server). By deselecting the checkbox, those protocols can be individually disabled.
The standard UDP/TCP ports can be changed in the respective protocol settings. An
example for the FTP server is shown for FTP in Figure 42. The FTP server is used for
instance to update the firmware (see Section 9.1) or to upload a new data point
configuration. Note that HTTP for the Web server can only be disabled on the console
interface or by using the device configuration of the Configurator.
Figure 42: FTP server configuration on the Ethernet port.
4.2.5 CEA-709 Configuration (LDALI-3E10X only)
The CEA-709 protocol can be enabled/disabled as shown in Figure 43. The protocol
settings box on the right-hand side displays the current transceiver settings. Note, that
enabling the CEA-709 protocol will disable the CEA-852 protocol and vice versa.
Figure 43: CEA-709 Configuration Page.
4.2.6 CEA-852 Device Configuration (LDALI-3E10X only)
The CEA-852 protocol is only available on the Ethernet port. To enable CEA-852 on the
device, select the CEA-852 (CEA-709 over IP) checkbox on the Ethernet tab of the port
configuration page. Note, that enabling the CEA-852 protocol will disable the CEA-709
protocol and vice versa.
The CEA-852 protocol settings are displayed in the settings box on the right-hand side as
shown in Figure 44. Typically, the device is added to an IP channel by entering the relevant
information on a configuration server. The configuration server then contacts the CEA-852
device of the L-DALI and sends its configuration.
The field Config server address and Config server port display the IP address and port of
the configuration server, which manages the L-DALI and the IP channel. The field Config
client port represents the IP port of the L-DALI’s CEA-852 device. This setting should be
left at its default (1628) unless there are more than one CEA-852 devices operating behind a
single NAT router. Please refer to the L-IP User Manual [1] to learn more about NAT
configuration.
In the field Device name the user can enter a descriptive name for the L-DALI, which will
appear in the IP channel to identify this device. You can enter a device name with up to 15
characters. It is recommended to use unique device names throughout the IP channel.
The Channel mode field reflects the current channel mode of the CEA-852 device. It is
configured by the configuration server. If there are any two devices in the channel which
use the same IP address but different ports (e.g., multiple L-DALI behind one NAT router)
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
49
LOYTEC
the channel switches to Extended NAT mode. Please refer to the L-IP User Manual [1] to
learn more about configuring the Extended NAT mode in the configuration server.
Figure 44: CEA-852 Device Configuration Page.
The configuration server sets the SNTP server addresses and the Channel timeout.
The filed Escrow timeout defines how long the CEA-852 device on the L-DALI waits for
out-of-sequence CEA-852 data packets before they are discarded. Please enter the time in
ms or ‘0’ to disable escrowing. The maximum time is 255 ms.
The field Aggregation timeout defines the time interval in which multiple CEA-709
packets are combined into a single CEA-852 data packet. Please enter the time in ms or ‘0’
to disable aggregation. The maximum time is 255 ms. Note that disabling aggregation will
negatively affect the performance of the CEA-852 device of the L-DALI.
The field MD5 authentication enables or disables MD5 authentication. Note that MD5
authentication cannot be used together with the Echelon’s i.LON 1000 since the
i.LON 1000 is not fully compliant with the CEA-852 authentication method. MD5 can be
used with the i.LON 600. In the following field MD5 secret enter the 16-byte MD5 secret.
Note that for security purposes the active MD5 secret is not displayed. You may enter the
16 bytes as one string or with spaces between each byte, e.g., 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88
99 AA BB CC DD EE FF.
Also note that entering the MD5 secret on the Web interface may pose a security risk. Since
the information is transmitted over the network it can be subject for eavesdroppers on the
line. It is recommended to use a cross-over cable.
In the field Location string the user can enter a descriptive test which identifies the
physical location of the L-DALI. A location string can have a maximum length of 255
characters. This is optional and for informational purposes only.
If the CEA-852 device on the L-DALI is used behind a NAT router, the public IP address of
the NAT router or firewall must be known. To automatically detect the NAT address leave
the Auto-NAT checkmark enabled.
The Multicast Address field allows the user to add the CEA-852 device of the L-DALI into
a multi-cast group for the CEA-852 IP channel. Enter the channel’s IP multi-cast address
here. Please contact your system administrator on how to obtain a valid multi-cast address.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
50
LOYTEC
To learn when it is beneficial to use multi-cast addresses in your channel please refer to the
L-IP User Manual [1].
4.2.7 BACnet Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only)
Figure 45 shows the BACnet device configuration page. This configuration page allows
setting the Device ID, which is the instance part of the Object_Identifier property of the
BACnet Device object. The field Device name holds the name of the BACnet device object
(property Object_Name).
Important!
The device ID and device name must be unique within the BACnet internetwork.
Figure 45: BACnet Device Configuration.
Further, the description and location can be configured. These configuration items
correspond to the properties Description, and Location respectively of the BACnet Device
object.
On the settings for BACnet/IP refer to Section 4.2.8. For configuring the MS/TP data link
refer to Section 4.2.9.
Note:
If this page displays the message “Device communication is disabled via BACnet
network!” the device has been externally disabled. Reboot the device to activate
communication again.
4.2.8 BACnet/IP Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only)
The BACnet/IP protocol is available on the Ethernet port. To enable BACnet/IP on the
device, select the BACnet/IP checkbox on the Ethernet tab of the port configuration page.
Please note that the BACnet MS/TP protocol will be disabled.
The BACnet/IP protocol settings are displayed in the settings box on the right-hand side as
shown in Figure 46. If the BACnet/IP network uses a non-default UDP port number other
than 47808/0xBAC0, enter this port in the BACnet/IP port field. Enter ‘0’ in this field for
switching back to the default setting.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
51
LOYTEC
Figure 46: BACnet/IP Configuration.
In the field BACnet/IP mode the operation mode of the device is selected:

Device (Default): In this mode the device operates as a regular BACnet/IP device on
the local network without other advanced features.

Foreign Device (FD): In this mode, the device registers at an existing BBMD in the
BACnet/IP network as a foreign device. It is used, if the device is located as a single
BACnet/IP device on a remote IP subnet or behind a NAT router. If operated as a
foreign device behind a NAT router, port forwarding to the BACnet/IP port (UDP,
default port 0xBAC0) and optionally to the Web server and FTP server port (TCP,
default port 80 and 21) must be setup in the NAT router. If foreign device is selected,
the following, additional settings must be made:
o
FD BBMD IP address and FD BBMD port: IP address and port of the
remote BBMD the device registers at as a foreign device.
o
FD re-registration: A foreign device must periodically re-register at a
BBMD. Here you can setup the corresponding interval. The default is 1800
seconds.
o
FD retry timeout and FD retries: Here you can specify the behavior, if
registration does not work instantly. These values should be left at default:
30000ms / 3 retries.
4.2.9 MS/TP Configuration (LDALI-ME20X only)
The BACnet MS/TP protocol can be enabled on the device’s port Port1. To enable it, click
the BACnet MS/TP radio button as shown in Figure 47. By default the BACnet MS/TP
port is disabled.
Figure 47: MS/TP Configuration.
The MS/TP protocol settings are displayed in the settings box on the right-hand side as
shown in Figure 47. Mandatory settings are the MS/TP node number and the MS/TP
baud rate. The MS/TP node number determines the physical address of the device on the
MS/TP channel and must be in the range from ‘0’ to the number configured with the
MS/TP max master configuration option. It must be unique within the MS/TP channel.
The Baud rate on the MS/TP channel can be set to 9600, 19200, and 38400 Baud.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Important:
52
LOYTEC
All masters on the MS/TP channel must have the same setting for MS/TP max master.
Decreasing the default value 127 of MS/TP max master may reduce latency on the
MS/TP bus.
It is strongly recommended to leave the MS/TP max info frames and the MS/TP max
master configuration options at their default settings. In any case the MS/TP max master
number must be high enough to include the highest MS/TP node number of all masters on
the channel. Slave devices may have a higher MS/TP node number than MS/TP max
master.
To operate with slow devices on the MS/TP network set the Network Timing option to
slow. This increases a number of timeouts, which is needed by some devices, but slows
down network communication. If communication problems occur in standard mode, try
setting the slow mode. For fine-tuning other parameters please refer to Section 8.2.
Note, that BACnet/IP will be disabled, when the MS/TP port is enabled.
4.2.10 E-Mail Configuration
The Web interface provides the E-Mail configuration page to set up an E-Mail account,
which is used to send E-Mails. The content and time when E-Mails are sent is configured
through the Configurator software (see Section 6.10.5). The E-Mail configuration page is
shown in Figure 48.
In the field for the outgoing E-Mail server, enter the SMTP server of your Internet provider.
Typically, the SMTP server port can be left at 25. In the field Source E-Mail Address,
enter the E-Mail address of the L-DALI’s E-Mail account. In the field Source E-Mail
Sender Name enter a name that the E-Mail will display as the source name. Note, that only
ASCII characters are allowed in the name. If replies shall be sent to another E-Mail address,
specify this in the Reply E-Mail Address.
If the provider’s SMTP server requires authentication, enter the required user name and
password. Note, that only username/password is supported. SSL/TLS authentication is not
supported by the L-DALI (e.g., Hotmail, gmail cannot be used).
To verify the E-Mail configuration, reboot the device to let the changes take effect and
return to the E-Mail configuration page. Then press one of the Send Test E-Mail buttons.
Note, that a DNS server must be configured in the IP settings (see Section 4.2.4) to resolve
the E-Mail server host name. The Web UI displays a warning message at the top of the
page, if the DNS configuration is missing.
Figure 48: E-Mail Configuration
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
53
LOYTEC
4.2.11 DALI Installation
Figure 48 shows the initial DALI configuration page. The DALI channels can be selected by
clicking on the different tabs at the top of the page labeled Channel 1, Channel 2, etc.
Figure 49: DALI Installation: Initial View
4.2.11.1 Installing DALI devices
To install DALI devices press the Rescan button. The L-DALI scans the DALI channel and
lists the detected devices under Scanned Devices not in Database in the lower halve of the
Web interface (see Figure 50).
The scanned DALI devices have to be assigned to LONMARK or BACnet objects
respectively. This can be done by one of two ways:
Version 2.0.1

Auto Assign: Press the button Auto Assign to assign the scanned lamps and
sensors randomly to LONMARK objects.

Manual Assign: For each detected DALI lamp/sensor a drop-down list of
available LONMARK objects is displayed. Select a fieldbus object and press the
button Save Assignment. To identify a DALI lamp/sensor press the Wink button.
The duration for how long a lamp/sensor winks can be configured.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
54
LOYTEC
Figure 50: DALI Installation: Rescan
If a DALI device type (e.g. emergency lighting) has been configured during the off-line
preparation steps of the L-DALI configuration (see Section 6.8.1.2), this device type must
match the device type of the assigned device. In case of Manual Assign, the drop-down list
will only offer devices with matching device type.
After the lamps/sensors have been assigned they are listed under Devices in Database in
the upper half of the Web interface (see Figure 51). The table displays the following
information:
Version 2.0.1

Name: This column displays the name of the DALI device. Click on the name to
jump to the data point configuration page of the corresponding fieldbus object.
The name can be changed by editing the nciLocation (LONMARK) or
Object_Name (BACnet) property.

Type: Displays the type of the DALI device.

Nominal Power: Displays the nominal power for DALI lamps. Some DALI
ballasts report their nominal power. For DALI ballasts which do not support this
feature the nominal power can be configured by the configuration property
nciNominalPwr (LONMARK) or Nominal_Power (BACnet) of the corresponding
fieldbus object.

Status: This column displays the status of the DALI device and the current value.
In addition the battery charge is displayed for self-contained emergency lights
providing this information.

Short Address: DALI short address which was assigned to the device by the
L-DALI.

Serial Number: This column displays the serial number of the DALI device if
available. Not all DALI devices have a serial number.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual

55
LOYTEC
Buttons: Each DALI device can be winked. The wink duration can be configured.
DALI lamps can be switched on/off manually and DALI light sensors can be
calibrated. The calibration of a light sensor is described in Section 4.2.11.5.
Figure 51: DALI Installation: Device Assignment
4.2.11.2 Reset a DALI network
In case of a misconfigured DALI network, the Reset button can be used to reset the DALI
configuration of all DALI devices in the network including their short address assignment.
Note that if the DALI network is reset, all DALI related configuration data is lost.
4.2.11.3 Manage Devices
The devices listed under Devices in Database can be managed by checking the box at the
right of the devices row. Then the desired function must be selected with the drop down box
Action on Selected. Finally the Execute button must be pressed to perform the function.
The following management functions are supported:
Version 2.0.1

Delete: Delete the selected device(s) from the data base. This clears the
assignment to a LONMARK/BACnet object, the group assignment, and the device
name. Further, it resets the DALI device to factory defaults.

Unassign: Clear the assignment to a LONMARK/BACNET object, but keep the
group assignment and the device name.

Wink: Wink the selected devices.

On: Switch the selected devices on (applies only to lamps).

Off: Switch the selected devices off (applies only to lamps).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
56
LOYTEC

Reset Run Hours: Reset the run hours of the selected lamps (applies only to
lamps).

Reset Energy Count: Reset the run hours of the selected lamps (applies only to
lamps).

Start Burn-In: Start the burn-in mode. Some lamps require a burn-in time during
which they must not be dimmed. The burn-in time is defined by the configuration
property nciBurnInTime (LONMARK) or Burn_In_Time (BACnet) of the
corresponding channel fieldbus object. During this time the lamps will only be
switched to on (100%) or off (0%) but not dimmed. The remaining burn-in time is
displayed in the status column (see Figure 52 for an example).

Abort Burn-In: Abort burn-in mode.
Figure 52: DALI Lamps in Burn-In Mode
Version 2.0.1

Emergency Light: Configure Test: Configure auto-test calendar of selfcontained emergency lights. See Section for 4.2.11.6 details.

Emergency Light: Start Function Test: Start function test of self-contained
emergency lights supporting this function. Please refer to the documentation of
the ballast vendor to determine whether the ballast supports execution of a
function test. Whether the function test is executed, pending or failed is shown in
the status of the selected devices. A test is pending if its execution is delayed as
the current state does not permit the execution of the test (e.g. battery not fully
charged, other test being performed, etc.). Test results will be stored in the
appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4).

Emergency Light: Stop Function Test: Abort any function test currently
executed or pending.

Emergency Light: Start Duration Test: Start duration test of self-contained
emergency lights supporting this function. Please refer to the documentation of
the ballast vendor to determine whether the ballast supports execution of a
duration test. Whether the duration test is executed, pending or failed is shown in
the status of the selected devices. A test is pending if its execution is delayed as
the current state does not permit the execution of the test (e.g. battery not fully
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
57
LOYTEC
charged, other test being performed, etc.). Test results will be stored in the
appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4).

Emergency Light: Stop Duration Test: Abort any duration test currently
executed or pending.
4.2.11.4 Replace a DALI device
If one or more broken DALI device must be replaced, the following steps must be
performed:
1.
Install the new device.
2.
Press the Rescan button to detect the newly installed and unconfigured device.
3.
After the scan, the DALI configuration page should look similar to Figure 53. The
broken device should be marked “Offline” in the Status field and the new device should
be listed in the Scanned Devices not in Database section. Select the defective device
in the drop-down list and press the Save Assignment button.
Figure 53: Replacing a defective DALI device
4.2.11.5 Sensor Calibration
To calibrate a light sensor press the Calibrate button on the DALI Installation page. The
DALI sensor calibration page is shown in Figure 54. The L-DALI device allows calibrating
the light sensor under up to seven different light conditions to counter any non-linearity of
the sensor.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
58
LOYTEC
Figure 54: Sensor Calibration
To calibrate the sensor perform the following steps:
1.
Measure the current lux level at the reference area (e.g. desk) using a luxmeter.
2.
Enter the measured lux level in the input field and select an unused index.
3.
Press the Calibrate button.
4.
To get the more accurate sensor reading, perform steps 1. – 3. With different light
conditions.
To reset the calibration table press the Clear Gain Table button.
4.2.11.6 Emergency Light Auto-Test Configuration
To configure the test calendar for the automatic function and duration tests of self-contained
emergency lights supporting this function check the box at the right of the devices row of
the DALI Installation page, choose Emergency Light: Configure Test from the Action on
Selected drop-down box and click on the Execute button. Now the L-DALI will read the
currently configured test calendar from the selected devices. When done it will show a page
similar to the one shown in Figure 55.
For both tests – function and duration test – a test interval in days and the time and date of
the next execution of the test can be specified. Click Save to store the new values in the
devices selected by the check box at the right of the devices row.
Note:
The resolution of the duration test interval is 7 days, the resolution of the delay to the next
test execution is 15 minutes. In both cases the value entered will be rounded to the next
appropriate value. Further, the time and date of the next test execution is calculated based
on the system time and time zone of the L-DALI as configured in the System Configuration
(see Section 4.2.1).
Test results will be stored in the appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
59
LOYTEC
Figure 55: Emergency Light Auto-Test Configuration
4.2.12 DALI Groups
The DALI ballasts can be assigned to DALI groups as shown in Figure 56. Click on the
name to jump to the data point configuration page of the fieldbus object corresponding to
the group. The name can be changed by editing the nciLocation (LONMARK) or
Object_Name (BACnet) property.
Figure 56: DALI Group Configuration
4.2.13 Data Points
The device’s Web interface provides a data point page, which lists all configured data
points on the device. An example is shown in Figure 57. The data point page contains a tree
view. Clicking on a particular tree item fills the right part of the page with a data point list
of that tree level and all levels below. Thus, one can get an easy overview of all data points.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
60
LOYTEC
The data point list displays the data point name, direction, type, current value, and data
point state. Inactive points are displayed in gray. If the data point list does not fit on one
page, there are page enumerator links at the bottom. Important data point states and their
implications are listed in Table 8.
Figure 57: Data point page.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
61
LOYTEC
Data Point Status
Description
normal
The data point is in normal operation state and possesses a value.
Invalid value
The data point has no valid value.
Offline (config)
The data point has a value but it is not reflected on the network
due to a configuration error (not commissioned, no binding, no
client mapping, etc.)
offline
The data point has a value but it is not reflected on the network
due to a communication error (e.g., the peer node is not online).
Unreliable
(offline)
The data point is in normal operation. The value of it, however,
is qualified as unreliable because a connected data point is
offline. For an output data point it means that the value was fed
from a connection, where the source is offline. For an input data
point it means that the connected output data point could not
send the value to the network.
Unreliable (range)
The data point is in normal operation. The value of it, however,
is qualified unreliable because the value is an out-of-range value
for the connected data point. The value is limited to the
supported range.
Unreliable
The data point is in normal operation. The value of the data point
or a connected data point has been tagged as unreliable over the
network. This is the case when the BACnet reliability has been
written.
Not configured
The data point is mapped to a port, which is not configured (e.g.,
the port is disabled).
Inactive
The data point is inactive and the line is grayed-out. Values can
be written but no network communication is triggered. This can
be the case, if a data point is not used in the configuration or it is
connected to a BACnet server object, which is not present on the
device.
Table 8: Data Point States.
The data point names are links. Clicking on such a link opens a detailed page on that data
point. If the data point supports it, the user can also enter a new data point value as depicted
in Figure 58.
Figure 58: Data point details page.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
62
LOYTEC
Clicking on the Set button writes the new value to the device’s data server. When setting a
value, the Web page displays the status of the action:

Successfully set value: The new value has been successfully set in the data point and
the update has been sent on the network, if it is a network data point.

Could not send value update: The new value has been set but it has not been sent out
on the network. The reason can be that the peer node is currently offline or there is a
configuration error. The data point status reflects this error.

Could not set value (error code): The new value has not been set because of an
internal error. Please contact LOYTEC with the error code.
4.2.14 Trend
The Web interface provides a configuration page to re-configure trend logs at run-time. The
changes made to the trend logs take effect immediately without the needs for a reboot of the
device. Allocating new trend logs can only be done in the configuration software (see
Section 6.14.1). The trend log main page displays all available trend logs. Click on the trend
log to be edited. This opens the trend log configuration page. An example is shown in
Figure 59.
The user can change the Trend Mode, the Fill Mode, the Log Interval and the Fill Level
Notification. Furthermore, data points can be added to the trend log by clicking the Add…
button. A data point selector dialog opens. Click on a data point for adding it. For removing
a data point from the trend log, click on it in the Logged Data Points list and hit the
Remove button. Save the changes made by clicking the Save button. For more information
on how a trend log can be configured please refer to the Configurator Section 6.14.
Figure 59: Trend log configuration page.
4.2.15 Scheduler
The Web interface provides the scheduler page to edit its schedules at run-time, i.e., change
the times and values that shall be scheduled. Allocating new schedules can only be done in
the configuration software (see Section 6.12). The scheduler main page displays all
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
63
LOYTEC
available schedules. Click on the schedule to be edited. This opens the scheduler page. An
example is shown in Figure 60.
Figure 60: Schedule Configuration Page.
The effective period defines when this schedule shall be in effect. Leave From and To at
‘*.*.*’ to make this schedule always in-effect. Otherwise enter dates, such as ’30.1.2000’.
To entirely disable a scheduler de-select the Enable Schedule check box.
Schedules are defined per day. On the left-hand side, the weekdays Monday through
Sunday can be selected, or exception days from the calendar, e.g., Holidays. Once a day is
selected, the times and values can be defined in the daily planner on the right-hand side. In
the example shown in Figure 60, on Monday the value OC_OCCUPIED is scheduled at
7:00am and the value OC_UNOCCUPIED is scheduled at 6:00pm. The same principle
applies to exception days. Exception days override the settings of the normal weekday. Put
a check mark on those exception days from the calendar, which shall be used in the
schedule. To edit the date ranges of exception days click on the links to the used calendars,
e.g., ‘Calendar’ or ‘Schedule_nviOccSensor’. The ‘Schedule_nviOccSensor’ is a calendar,
which is embedded into the schedule and not accessible by other schedulers. For more
information on how to set up schedules and calendars refer to Section 6.12.
To define actual values for the names such as OC_OCCUPIED click on the tab Presets as
shown in Figure 61. To define a new value, click on the button Add Preset. This adds a
new column. Enter a new preset name. Then enter values for the data points in the preset
column. The Data Point Description column displays the short-hand name defined in the
configuration software. Click on this description to change it on the Web interface.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
64
LOYTEC
You can switch back and forth between the two tabs. Once the configuration is complete,
click on the Save button. This updates the schedule in the device. Any changes made
become effective immediately.
Figure 61: Scheduled Presets Configuration Page.
The Web UI also allows reconfiguring the scheduled data points. This change takes effect
immediately without a reboot of the device. To add and remove data points to the scheduler,
go to the Data Points tab. The configuration page is depicted in Figure 62. To add a new
data point, click the Add… button. To remove a data point, select the data point in the list
Scheduled Data Points by clicking on it and then press the Remove button. Finally, store
the changes by clicking the Save button. After modifying the scheduled data points, go
back to the Presets tab and enter descriptive value label names. For more information on
how to configure a scheduler please refer to the Configurator Section 6.12.
Figure 62: Re-configure scheduled data points on the Web UI.
4.2.16 Calendar
The Web interface provides the calendar page to edit its calendars at run-time, i.e. change
the exception days. The calendar main page displays all available calendars. Click on the
calendar to be edited. This opens the calendar configuration page. An example is shown in
Figure 63.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
65
LOYTEC
The effective period defines when this calendar shall be in effect. Leave From and To at
‘*.*.*’ to make this calendar always in-effect. Otherwise enter dates, such as ’30.1.2000’.
Figure 63: Calendar Configuration Page.
On the remainder of this page, work from left to right. Click on a calendar pattern or create
a new calendar pattern by clicking Add new entry. A calendar pattern defines a set of
pattern entries, which defines the actual dates or date ranges. In the example in Figure 63,
the calendar pattern holidays is selected.
In the Pattern Configuration box, the calendar pattern’s name can be edited. It also lists
the entries. New entries can be added by clicking Add new entry. Existing entries can be
selected and edited in the box on the right-hand side. In the example in Figure 63, the date
14.7.* is selected, which means “The 14.7. of every year”. Other entry types such as Date
Range and Week-and-Day can be selected. See Section 5.3 for more information about
defining exception dates.
4.2.17 Alarm
The Web interface provides the alarm page to view the currently pending alarms of its alarm
data points. The alarm main page displays all available alarm data points. Alarm objects
which have active alarms are displayed in red. Click on the alarm object to be viewed. This
opens the alarm summary page. An example is shown in Figure 64.
Active alarms are highlighted red. Inactive alarms which have not been acknowledged are
rendered in green. Alarms that can be acknowledged have an Ack button. Press on the Ack
button to acknowledge the alarm. Depending on the technology, this and older alarm
records will be acknowledged. Acknowledged, active alarms are rendered in red. Click on
Reload to refresh your alarm list.
Inactive alarms that have been acknowledged disappear from the list. To record historical
information about those alarms, the alarm log must be used. See Section 4.3.9 for the alarm
log Web interface.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
66
LOYTEC
Figure 64: Alarm Summary Page.
4.2.18 Debug
Log messages can be activated for each LONMARK or BACnet Object present on the
L-DALI to allow analyzing the light and the sunblind applications (see Figure 65).
The debug log allows recording all changes on inputs and outputs as well as all application
internal transitions in case a fieldbus object does not behave as expected. Debug logs are
stored in RAM. The messages logged are in most cases self-explanatory.
Further, LOYTEC support requires a debug log to be able to analyze any potential
problems. Therefore, such a log should be created before contacting LOYTEC support.
Figure 65: Setup Debug Mask.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
67
LOYTEC
Figure 66: Debug Log.
4.3 Device Statistics
The device statistics pages provide advanced statistics information about the CEA-709
device, the CEA-852 device, the BACnet device, the System Log, the scheduler, the Alarm
Log and the Ethernet interface.
4.3.1 System Log
The System Log page prints all messages stored in the system log of the device. An example
is shown in Figure 67. This log data is important for trouble-shooting. It contains log entries
for reboots and abnormal operating conditions. When contacting LOYTEC support, have a
copy of this log ready.
Figure 67: System Log Page.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
68
LOYTEC
4.3.2 IP Statistics
Figure 68 shows the IP statistics page. It allows finding possible problems related to the IP
communication. Specifically any detected IP address conflicts are displayed (if the
L-DALI’s IP address conflicts with a different host on the network).
Figure 68: IP Statistics Page
4.3.3 CEA-852 Statistics (LDALI-3E10X only)
The CEA-852 statistics page displays the statistics data of the CEA-852 device on the
L-DALI. It is only displayed if the CEA-852 interface is enabled. The upper part of the
CEA-852 statistics page is depicted in Figure 69. To update the statistics data press the
button Update all CEA-852 statistics. To reset all statistics counters to zero, click on the
button Clear all CEA-852 statistics. The field Date/Time of clear will reflect the time of
the last counter reset.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
69
LOYTEC
Figure 69: Part of the CEA-852 Statistics Page
4.3.4 Enhanced Communications Test (LDALI-3E10X only)
The Enhanced Communications Test allows testing the CEA-852 communication path
between the CEA-852 device on the L-DALI and other CEA-852 devices as well as the
configuration server. The test thoroughly diagnoses the paths between individual members
of the IP channel and the configuration server in each direction. Port-forwarding problems
are recognized. For older devices or devices by other manufacturers, which do not support
the enhanced test features, the test passes as soon as a device is reachable, but adds a
comment, that the return path could not be tested. A typical output is shown in Figure 70.
The round-trip value (RTT) is measured as the time a packet sent to the peer device needs to
be routed back to the L-DALI. It is a measure for general network delay. If the test to a
specific member fails, a text is displayed to describe the possible source of the problem. The
reasons for failure are summarized in Table 9.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
70
LOYTEC
Figure 70: Enhanced Communication Test Output
Text displayed (Web icon)
Meaning
OK, Return path not tested (green
checkmark)
Displayed for a device which is reachable but which does not support the
feature to test the return path (device sending to this CEA-852 device).
Therefore a potential NAT router configuration error cannot be detected. If
the tested device is an L-IP, it is recommended to upgrade this L-IP to 3.0 or
higher.
Not reachable/not supported
This is displayed for the CS if it is not reachable or the CS does not support
this test. To remove this uncertainty it is recommended to upgrade the L-IP to
3.0 or higher.
(red exclamation)
Local NAT config. Error
(red exclamation)
Peer not reachable
(red exclamation)
This is displayed if the CEA-852 device of the L-DALI is located behind a
NAT router or firewall, and the port-forwarding in the NAT-Router (usually
1628) or the filter table of the firewall is incorrect.
Displayed for a device, if it is not reachable. No RTT is displayed. The device
is either not online, not connected to the network, has no IP address, or is not
reachable behind its NAT router. Execute this test on the suspicious device to
determine any NAT configuration problem.
Table 9: Possible Communication Problems.
4.3.5 CEA-709 Statistics (LDALI-3E10X only)
The CEA-709 statistics page displays statistics data of the CEA-709 nodes. Each DALI
channel corresponds to a separated CEA-709 node. If the device supports multiple DALI
channels it is possible to switch between the CEA-709 nodes using the tabs on the top (see
Figure 71). This data can be used to troubleshoot networking problems. To update the data,
click on the button Update CEA-709 statistics.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
71
LOYTEC
Figure 71: CEA-709 Statistics Page
4.3.6 BACnet MS/TP Statistics (LDALI-ME20X only)
The BACnet MS/TP statistics page is only available, when the MS/TP data link layer is
enabled (see Section 4.2.9) and supported by the L-INX model. An example is shown in
Figure 72. The separated part on the top of the table contains the most important statistics
data.
The MS/TP token status reports the current token passing state. In state OK, the token is
circulating between the masters. This is the normal state, when multiple masters are on the
MS/TP network. The state SOLE MASTER is the normal state when the device is the only
master on the network. If there are multiple masters on the network, this state is a hint to a
broken cable. In state TOKEN LOST, the token is currently not circulating.
The counter MS/TP lost tokens is an indicator for communication problems on the
MST/TP network. If it increases, there is a cabling, ground, or termination problem. The
counters Rcv OK and Send OK reflect the number of successfully received or transmitted
MS/TP frames. Check these counters to verify that communication is flowing on the MS/TP
segment.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
72
LOYTEC
Figure 72: BACnet MS/TP Statistics Page.
4.3.7 DALI Statistics
The DALI statistics page displays the statistics data of the DALI channels. If the device
supports multiple DALI channels it is possible to switch between the channels using the
tabs on the top (see Figure 73). To update the statistics data press the button Reload. To
reset all statistics counters to zero, click on the button Reset Channel Statistics. The field
Date/Time of clear will reflect the time of the last counter reset.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
73
LOYTEC
Figure 73: DALI Statistics
4.3.8 Scheduler Statistics Page
The scheduler statistics page provides an overview of what is scheduled at which day and
which time. In the Display Schedules list select a single schedule to view its scheduled
values and times. Use the multi-select feature to get the overview of more schedules. An
example is shown in Figure 74.
Figure 74: Scheduler Statistics Page
4.3.9 Alarm Log Page
The alarm log page provides an overview of all alarm logs on the system. Click on one of
the links to view a specific alarm log. Each alarm log contains a historical log of alarm
transitions. When an inactive and acknowledged alarm disappears from the alarm summary
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
74
LOYTEC
page (live list), the alarm log contains this last transition and maintains it over a reboot. An
example is shown in Figure 75.
To refresh the alarm log contents click on the Reload button. Currently active alarms
cannot be acknowledged in this historical view. Follow the link to the attached alarm
objects to get to the respective live lists, where alarms can be acknowledged on the Web
interface (see Section 4.2.17).
Figure 75: Alarm Log Page.
The alarm log contents can be uploaded from the device in a CSV formatted file. Click on
the button Upload Alarm Log to upload the current log. To clear the log, press the button
Clear Alarm Log. Please note, that this permanently purges all historical alarm log data of
this alarm log.
4.4 Reset, Contact, Logout
The menu item Reset allows two essential operations:

Rebooting the L-DALI from a remote location, or

Reset the data point configuration from a remote location. This option clears all data
points incl. parameter values, the entire port configuration, and the DALI configuration
stored in the L-DALI. It leaves the IP settings intact.
The Contact item provides contact information and a link to the latest user manual and the
latest firmware version.
The Logout item closes the current session.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
75
LOYTEC
5 Concepts
5.1 Alarming
The alarming architecture comprises a number of entities. Objects that monitor values of
data points and generate alarms depending on an alarm condition are called alarm sources.
The alarms are reported to an alarm server on the same device. The alarm server maintains
a list of alarm records, called the alarm summary. The alarm server is the interface to access
the local alarms. This can be done over the network or the Web UI.
An alarm record contains the information about the alarm. This includes information about
the alarm time, the source of the alarm, an alarm text, an alarm value, an alarm type, an
alarm priority, and an alarm state. An alarm record undergoes a number of state changes
during its life-cycle. When the alarm occurs, it is active. When the alarm condition
subsides, the alarm becomes inactive. Active alarms can be acknowledged by an operator.
Then they become active acknowledged. Active alarms can also become inactive, but an
acknowledgement is still required. Then they become ack-pending. When an alarm is
inactive and was acknowledged it disappears from the alarm summary.
Other devices can access the alarm information of an alarm server. These devices are alarm
clients. They register with the alarm server and get notified about changes to the alarm
summary. Alarm clients can be used to display the current alarm summary and acknowledge
alarms.
Depending on the underlying technology, some restrictions to the available alarm
information and acknowledgement behavior may exist.
5.2 Historical Alarm Log
The alarm summary of the alarm objects contains a live list of currently active and
acknowledge-pending alarms. As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been
acknowledged, it disappears from the alarm summary. To store a historical log of alarm
transitions an alarm log is utilized. An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm
objects.
The alarm log is always local and stored as a file on the device. The size of an alarm log is
configurable. The alarm log operates as a ring buffer. As soon as its size limit is reached, the
oldest alarm log records are overwritten by newer alarm transitions. The alarm log is
available on the Web UI or can be uploaded from the device as a CSV file. The CSV file
can also be used as an E-Mail attachment.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
76
LOYTEC
5.3 Scheduling
Schedulers are objects that schedule values of data points on a timely basis. A scheduler
object is configured by which data points it shall schedule. This configuration is done by
the system engineer once when the system is designed. The configuration of the times and
values that shall be scheduled is not part of that initial configuration and may be changed
later. This distinction has to be kept in mind.
A scheduler object sets its data points to pre-defined values at specified times. The function
of the scheduler is state-based. This means, that after a value is scheduled, the scheduler
maintains its state for this value. It can re-transmit the scheduled values as appropriate (e.g.,
when rebooting). The pre-defined values are called /value presets/. A value preset contains
one or more values under a single label (e.g., “day” schedules the values {20.0, TRUE,
400}).
Which value preset is scheduled at what time is defined through a daily schedule. The daily
schedule defines the times and value presets in a 24-hour period. A schedule typically
contains daily schedules for the weekdays Monday through Sunday. See Figure 76 for an
example of a daily schedule.
Figure 76: Example of a Daily Schedule.
For some tasks the daily schedules on weekdays is sufficient. However, on some specific
dates, there may be exceptions to the regular week. This can be implemented by defining
daily schedules for exception days. For instance, there may be a separate daily schedule for
Holidays. The exception days are defined through a calendar. The calendar contains a
number of calendar patterns. Each calendar pattern describes a pattern of dates that define
the class of an exception, e.g., Holidays.
When a calendar is defined on a system, the exception days are available in all schedules.
When a schedule wants to define daily schedules for some of the available exception days,
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
77
LOYTEC
they need to be enabled in the schedule. See Figure 77 for an example where Holidays is
used.
Figure 77: Example of on used Exception Day.
The function of the exception is simple. The daily schedule of a regular weekday is
overridden by the daily schedule of the exception, when one of the specified date patterns is
in effect (e.g., July 14th in Holidays overrides the regular weekday). If more than one
exception days are in use, there may be conflicts on specific dates. These conflicts are
resolved by defining priorities for the different exceptions. The daily schedule of the
exception with the higher priority is eventually in effect. If two exceptions with the same
priority exist, it is not defined, which one is in effect. Therefore, always use distinct
priorities.
Apart from the defined value presets, there exist special events that can be scheduled in a
daily schedule. They affect how the scheduler behaves and which exception is active:

Invalid: If this value is scheduled, the scheduler transmits the invalid value. The
numeric representation of that invalid value is defined by the underlying data point and
is technology-specific.

Withdraw: If this value is scheduled, the scheduler takes the previously value preset
out of effect. This means that the daily schedule with the next lower priority becomes
effective. If no daily schedule with lower priority applies, the scheduler behaves as if it
was disabled. Figure 78 presents an example of the Maintenance exception day, which
schedules the maint value at 6 am and goes out of effect at 10 am. If the maintenance
day falls on a Monday, the regular schedule for Monday will be overridden by the
Maintenance schedule at 6 am and become effective again at 10 am sending the day
value.

Temporary Disable: If this value is scheduled, the entire scheduler is disabled until a
new event is scheduled in a daily schedule of the same or higher priority than the one
that has the temporary disable event. This type of event can be used to define periods
for manual override.
Please also refer to the technology-specific limitations described in Section 6.12.10 to learn
about special behavior of the respective networking technology.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
78
LOYTEC
Figure 78: Example using withdraw in an exception schedule.
The configuration of exceptions is done by calendar patterns in the calendar. Each calendar
pattern contains a number of pattern entries. These entries can define the following:

A single date: This defines a single date. Wildcards may be used in the year to specify
July 14th of every year.

A date range: This defines a range. Starting with a start date and ending with the end
date. No wildcards should be used.

A Week-and-Day definition: This defines dates based on a week, such as every 1 st
Friday in a month, every Monday, every last Wednesday of a month.
While exception days of a calendar are accessible to all schedules on a device, specific
exceptions can be defined, which are embedded into a specific schedule. These are referred
to as an embedded calendar. In contrast to a regular calendar each calendar pattern of an
embedded calendar can hold exactly one date entry. This can be a single date or a date
range. The embedded exception days are only visible to the schedule they are defined in.
Apart from these restrictions, embedded calendars behave like the regular calendar. Figure
77 shows an example for an embedded exception day named ‘24_12_xx’.
When a scheduler is executing the schedule on the local device, it is called a local
scheduler. Such a scheduler is configured to schedule data points and later its daily
schedules can be modified. When accessing the daily schedules of a scheduler, which
executes on a remote device, the object is called a remote scheduler. A remote scheduler has
the same interface to the user to modify daily schedules. A remote scheduler object can be
used as a user-interface for schedulers that execute on different devices.
5.4 Trending
Trending refers to the ability to log values of data points over time. A trend log object is
responsible for this task. It is configured, which data points shall be trended. Log records
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
79
LOYTEC
are generated either in fixed time intervals, on change-of-value conditions, or when a trigger
is activated.
The trend data is stored in a binary format on the device. The capacity of a given trend log
is configured. The trend log can be operated in one of two modes: (1) In linear mode the
trend file fills up until it reaches its capacity. It then stops logging. (2) In ring buffer mode.
In this mode the oldest log records are overwritten when the capacity is reached.
Trended data points can be logged as their actual values at given time instants or as an
aggregated value over the defined log interval. Aggregation can be calculated as minimum,
maximum, or average. Aggregation can be beneficial, if the trended value changes more
frequently than the selected log interval. Using aggregation, the log interval can be chosen
to limit the amount of logged data while preserving information of the trended value.
How many data points can be trended in one trend log is limited by the underlying
technology. So are some of the log modes. Refer to the technology sections for more
information.
5.5 E-Mail
The E-Mail function can be combined with the other AST features. The format of an E-Mail
is defined through E-Mail templates. An E-Mail template defines the recipients, the E-Mail
text, value parameters inserted into the text and triggers, which invoke the transmission of
an E-Mail. An E-Mail template can also specify one or more files to be sent along as an
attachment.
A prerequisite to sending E-Mails is the configuration of an E-Mail account on the L-DALI.
This can be done on the Web UI (see Section 4.2.7). It is recommended to use the E-Mail
server of your Internet provider. For public mailers enable the required authentication.
Please note that the L-DALI does currently not support the SSL/TLS E-Mail authentication
mechanism. Therefore, Hotmail and gmail cannot be used.
The amount of generated E-Mails can be limited using a rate limit algorithm. The
transmission of E-Mails can be disabled altogether by using a special data point. That data
point can be scheduled or driven over the network.
If an E-Mail cannot be sent (e.g. the mail server is not reachable), the mail delivery is retried
up to 24 times every 30 minutes.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
80
LOYTEC
6 The L-DALI Configurator
(LDALI-3E10X only)
This Chapter gives step-by-step instructions on how to commission L-DALI, setup and
commission the devices and groups on the connected DALI channels, configure the
parameters of the L-DALI’s light and sunblind applications, and setup advanced alarming,
scheduling and trending functionality. We show the configuration steps using LonMaker TE
but other LNS-based network management tools can be used as well to install and configure
the L-DALI. We also show how to configure the L-DALI without LNS.
Note:
Currently the L-DALI Configurator Software only support the LDALI-3E10X family of
products!
6.1 Installation
6.1.1 Software Installation
The L-DALI Configurator must be used to setup the data point configuration of the L-DALI.
The Configurator is installed as a plug-in tool for all LNS-based network management tools
as well as a stand-alone tool (for systems without LNS).
System requirements:
Version 2.0.1

LNS 3.1, Service Pack 8 or LNS TE SP5 or higher (for LNS mode),

Windows XP, Windows 2003 Server, Windows Vista, Windows 7, or Windows 2008
Server.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
81
LOYTEC
Figure 79: Last dialog of L-DALI Configurator Installer.
The L-DALI Configurator can be downloaded from the LOYTEC Web site
http://www.loytec.com. When asked whether to install the LONMARK resource files along
with the software at the end of the configuration process, check the corresponding checkbox
if the system does not have the newest resource files (see Figure 79).
6.1.2 Registration as a Plug-In
If the L-DALI shall be configured using LNS-based tools (e.g., NL200 or LonMaker), the
L-DALI Configurator needs to be registered as an LNS plug-in. In the following, the process
is described for LonMaker TE. Otherwise, please refer to the documentation of your
network management tool on how to register an LNS plug-in.
Note:
If you are using a LNS-based tool using an LNS version prior to LNS TE, registration of
the L-DALI Configurator as a Plug-In may take more than 10 minutes.
To Register in LonMaker TE
Version 2.0.1
1.
Open LonMaker and create a new network.
2.
Click Next until the plug-in registration tab appears in the Network Wizard. Select the
LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator (Version X.Y) from the list of Not Registered (see
Figure 80).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
82
LOYTEC
Figure 80: Select the Plug-in to be registered.
Note:
3.
Click Register. The Configurator now appears in the Pending list.
4.
Click Finish to complete the registration. Device templates for the L-DALI are added
automatically and XIF files are copied into the LNS import directory.
If you are using multiple databases (projects) make sure you have registered the plug-in in
each project.
5.
Under LonMaker  Network Properties  Plug-In Registration make sure that the
LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator (Version X.Y) shows up under Already
Registered.
Figure 81: Check that the L-DALI Configurator is properly registered.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
83
LOYTEC
6.1.3 Operating Modes
The Configurator can be used in on-line, off-line, and stand-alone mode. On-line and offline mode refers to the 2 operating modes of your LNS network management software.

On-line Mode: This is the preferred method to use the configuration utility. The
network management tool is attached to the network and all network changes are
directly propagated into the network. This mode must be used to add the device,
commission the device, scan the connected DALI channels, and download the
configuration into the device.

Off-line Mode: In off-line mode, the network management software is not attached to
the network or the device is not attached to the network, respectively. This mode can be
used to add the device using the device templates, setup DALI devices and groups,
configure the parameters of the L-DALIs light and sunblind applications, and setup
advanced alarming, scheduling and trending functionality.

Stand-alone Mode: The Configurator can also be executed as a stand-alone program.
This mode is useful for the engineer who doesn’t want to start the configuration
software as a plug-in from within network management software (e.g., NL-220,
LonMaker or Alex). Instead the engineer can work directly with the device when online
or engineer it offline.
6.2 Workflows for the L-DALI
This section discusses a number of work flows for configuring the L-DALI in different use
cases in addition to the simple use case in the quick-start scenario (see Chapter 2). The
description is intended to be high-level and is depicted in flow diagrams. The individual
steps refer to later sections, which describe each step in more detail. In principle, the
L-DALI Configurator supports the following use cases:

On-Line (see Section 6.2.2)

Off-Line (see Section 6.2.3)
6.2.1 Involved Configuration Files
In the configuration process, there are a number of files involved:

XIF file: This is the standard file format to exchange the static interface of a device.
This file can be used to create a device in the database without having the L-DALI online. There exists a standard XIF file for the FT port (“L-DALI_FT-10.xif”) and one for
the IP-852 port (“L-DALI_IP-10L.xif”). In addition, there are XIF files for an L-DALI
with enabled Emergency interface (“L-DALI_emergency_FT-10.xif” and
“L-DALI_emergency_IP-10L.xif”, see Section 7.2) and for use with legacy mode
(“L-DALI_legacy_FT-10.xif” and “L-DALI_legacy_IP-10L.xif”, see Section 6.6).

L-DALI Configurator project file: This file contains the DALI configuration for all
ports, light and sunblind application parameters and the AST configuration. These files
end with “.ldali”. It stores all relevant configuration data and is intended to be saved on
a PC to backup the L-DALI’s configuration.
6.2.2 On-Line
The flow diagram in Figure 82 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to
configure the L-DALI when the device and the DALI network including all DALI devices
(e.g. ballasts, sensors, etc.) are available on-line.
First, the L-DALI device must be added to LNS (see Section 6.3). Then the L-DALI
Configurator must be started in plug-in mode to configure the L-DALI (see Section 6.7.1).
In the Configurator, the DALI network is scanned for DALI devices and the devices are
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
84
LOYTEC
setup and assigned to DALI groups (see Section 6.7.6). Then the parameters for the light
application and the sunblind application can be configured (see Section 6.9). Optionally,
alarming, scheduling and trending functionality can be set up (see Section 6.10). Finally,
the configuration needs to be downloaded to the L-DALI (see Section 6.7.4). It is
recommended to save the complete configuration to a file for being able to replace an
L-DALI in the network. Additionally a backup should be created (see Section 4.2.2).
START
Add LDALI-3E10X to LNS
Section 6.3
Start the Configurator as a plug-in
Section 6.6.1
Scan DALI network and setup DALI devices and
groups
Section 6.7
Configure LDALI-3E10X application parameters
Section 6.8
Setup alarming, scheduling & trending
Section 6.9
Download configuration to LDALI-3E10X
Section 6.6.4
DONE
Figure 82: Basic on-line design-flow.
To add more DALI devices, change DALI group assignment or application parameters
simply repeat the steps described above.
Of course, the same work flow can be used if the Configurator is used in stand-alone mode
(see Section 6.1.3). In this case the L-DALI device needs not to be added to the LNS if the
connection is established using FTP.
Important!
If the L-DALI shall be used with a non-standard network interface (e.g. Emergency
interface or enabled legacy mode) please also see Section 6.2.5.
6.2.3 Off-Line
The flow diagram in Figure 83 shows the steps that need to be followed in order to
configure the L-DALI off-line. In this scenario the first steps can be performed without the
L-DALI and the DALI network being physically available. This allows to prepare the on-line
commissioning and thus to speed up the time required for on-site installation. Further, some
steps of the on-line commissioning part can be performed by less skilled personnel using the
L-DALI Web Interface.
First, the L-DALI device must be added to LNS (see Section 6.3). Then the L-DALI
Configurator must be started in plug-in mode to configure the L-DALI (see Section 6.7.1).
Note, that the device is off-line. Select the correct L-DALI model in the Model menu. Next
setup names, groups and optionally ballast type for the DALI devices (see Section 6.7.6).
The names assigned must allow identifying physical devices later on (e.g. “Room 301-1” for
first ballast in room 301). The ballast type (e.g. emergency light) must be selected if any
device type specific parameters shall be configured in the next step. Then configure the
parameters for the light application and the sunblind application (see Section 6.9).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
85
LOYTEC
Optionally, alarming, scheduling and trending functionality can be set up (see Section
6.10). Save the created configuration to a file.
When the L-DALI is physically available, first commission all ports of the L-DALI in LNS.
Then again start the Configurator in plug-in mode (see Section 6.7.1). Load the file created
during the off-line preparation and download the configuration to the L-DALI (see Section
6.7.4). Now, scan the DALI channels, either using the Configurator (see Section 6.7.6) or
the Web Interface (see Section 4.2.11) and assign the DALI devices found to the names
entered during off-line preparation. Finally, it is recommended to upload and save the
complete configuration to a file for being able to replace an L-DALI in the network.
Additionally a backup should be created (see Section 4.2.2).
START OFF-LINE
START ON-LINE
Add LDALI-3E10X to LNS
Section 6.3
Commission LDALI-3E10X in LNS
Start the Configurator as a plug-in
Section 6.6.1
Start the Configurator as a plug-in
Section 6.6.1
Select correct L-DALI model in the Model menu
Load configuration file created during off-line
preparation
Setup DALI device names, groups, and ballast types
Section 6.7
Download configuration to LDALI-3E10X
Section 6.6.4
Configure LDALI-3E10X application parameters
Section 6.8
Scan DALI channels and assign devices
Section 6.7 or Section 4.2.8
Setup alarming, scheduling & trending
Section 6.9
DONE ON-LINE
Save configuration to file
DONE OFF-LINE
Figure 83: Basic off-line design-flow.
To add more DALI devices, change DALI group assignment or application parameters it is
recommended to use the on-line work flow (see Section 6.2.2).
Of course, the same work flow can be used if the Configurator is used in stand-alone mode
(see Section 6.1.3). In this case the L-DALI device needs not to be added to the LNS if the
connection is established using FTP.
Important!
If the L-DALI shall be used with a non-standard network interface (e.g. Emergency
interface or enabled legacy mode) please also see Section 6.2.5.
6.2.4 Replace an L-DALI
An L-DALI can be replaced in the network by another unit. This might be necessary if a
hardware defect occurs. First of all, the replacement L-DALI needs to be configured with the
appropriate IP settings, including all relevant CEA-852 device settings. The work flow is
depicted in Figure 84.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
86
LOYTEC
START
Replace all ports of LDALI-3E10X
Section 6.4
Start the Configurator plug-in or stand-alone
Section 6.6.1 and 6.6.2
Load a saved LDALI-3E10X project file
Download configuration to LDALI-3E10X
Section 6.6.4
DONE
Figure 84: Basic work flow to configure a replacement device.
First, if using an LNS-based tool, all ports of the L-DALI device need to be replaced in that
tool (see Section 6.4). If you are not using LNS, then refer to your network management
tool’s reference manual on how to replace a device.
After replacing the CEA-709 ports start the Configurator software stand-alone or as a plugin and connect to the device (see Section 6.7.1 and 6.7.2). Load the L-DALI Configurator
project file from the directory, which has been saved when the original L-DALI has been
configured or modified. Double-check, if the DALI configuration seems ok and all DALI
devices in use are assigned, that is, have a valid short address assigned. Then download the
configuration to the L-DALI (see Section 6.7.4).
As an alternative to using the latest L-DALI Configurator project file, an up-to-date device
backup can be restored (see Section 4.2.2).
Important!
If the L-DALI is used with a non-standard network interface (e.g. Emergency interface
or enabled legacy mode) please also see Section 6.2.5.
6.2.5 Using non-standard network interface
If the L-DALI shall be used with a non-standard network interface – e.g. Emergency
interface (see Section 7.2) or enabled legacy mode (see Section 6.6) – the interface must be
changed before the device is commissioned or used for a replace operation by LNS.
Changing the interface either involves downloading the data point configuration in case of
the Emergency interface or enabling the legacy mode using the Web Interface or the System
Settings in the Project Settings of the Configurator Software.
Important!
In both cases it is crucial, that the changes have to be done using an IP connection. If no
IP connection to the L-DALI is available at the final installation site, it is mandatory,
that the interface is changed before the device is physically installed!
6.3 Adding L-DALI
To configure an L-DALI in your LonMaker drawing, the device needs to be added to the
LNS database and commissioned. This Section refers to LonMaker TE and describes how to
add an L-DALI to your database.
Note:
Version 2.0.1
For the L-DALI versions supporting multiple DALI channels (LDALI-3E102 and
LDALI-3E104) for each DALI channel used a LonMark device must be added to the LNS
database.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
87
LOYTEC
To Add a Device to LonMaker TE
1.
In your LonMaker drawing, drag a device stencil into the drawing. Enter an appropriate
name as shown in Figure 85.
Figure 85: Create a new device in the drawing.
Version 2.0.1
2.
Select Commission Device if the L-DALI is already connected to the network.
3.
In the Device Template group box select the existing device template of the L-DALI.
Select “LOYTEC L-DALI FT-10”, if the L-DALI is configured to use the FT-10
interface, or “LOYTEC L-DALI IP-10L”, if the L-DALI is configured to be on the IP
channel. For information on how to configure which port to use, refer to Section 4.2.5
for the Web UI. In addition, there are corresponding device templates for an L-DALI
with enabled Emergency interface (“LOYTEC L-DALI emergency FT-10” and
“LOYTEC L-DALI emergency IP-10L”, see Section 7.2). If using the Emergency
interface, make sure the appropriate data point configuration was already loaded to the
device (see Section 6.2.5).
4.
Select the channel, which the L-DALI is connected to and click Next.
5.
The following dialog shown in Figure 86 appears, click Next.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
88
LOYTEC
Figure 86: Leave defaults for Location.
6.
Check Service Pin as the device identification method as shown in Figure 87 and click
Next.
Figure 87: Use Service Pin.
Version 2.0.1
7.
Click Next in the following screens until you get to the final dialog shown in Figure 88.
8.
If the device is already on-net, select Online. Also make sure to select Current device
values for “Source of CP Values” (see Section 6.5 for details).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
89
LOYTEC
Figure 88: Final dialog.
9.
Click Finish. A dialog will prompt to press the service pin.
10. Finally, you should get the device added to your drawing as depicted in Figure 89.
LNS Network Interface
ldali
Channel 1
Figure 89: The L-DALI has been added to the drawing.
11. Repeat steps 1-10 for each CEA-709 node representing one DALI channel.
6.4 Replace an L-DALI
This Section describes how to replace an L-DALI in your LNS database. The description
refers to LonMaker TE. Let’s assume there is a device ‘ldali’ in the LNS database as shown
in Figure 90.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
90
LOYTEC
For the L-DALI versions supporting multiple DALI channels (LDALI-3E102 and
LDALI-3E104) for each DALI channel a LonMark device representing that channel must
be replaced in the LNS database.
nviEmergTest
nviGPOverride
nviGPScene
nviGPSetting
nviGPValue
nvoBatteryCharge
nvoGPEnergyCnt
nvoGPFailure
nvoGPRunHours
nvoGPValueFb
nvoPowerOff
ldali.LAGroup[4]
LNS Network Interface
ldali
Channel 1
Figure 90: LonMaker drawing with one L-DALI.
Important!
If using the Emergency interface, make sure the appropriate data point configuration
was already loaded to the device (see Section 6.2.5).
To Replace a Device in LonMaker TE
1.
Select the device and right-click on the device shape.
2.
Select Commissioning  Replace…. This opens the LonMaker Replace Device
Wizard as shown in Figure 91.
Figure 91: LonMaker replace device wizard.
Version 2.0.1
3.
Choose the existing device template and click Next.
4.
In the following window shown in Figure 92 click Next.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
91
LOYTEC
Figure 92: Click Next without loading an application image.
5.
Then select Online for State and New Device Values for “Source of CP Values” as
shown in Figure 93 and click Next.
Figure 93: Select online state and source of CP values.
6.
Version 2.0.1
Select the Service pin method and click on Finish as shown in Figure 94.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
92
LOYTEC
Figure 94: Select Service Pin and click Finish.
7.
Then the service pin requestor opens. Press the service pin on the replacement L-DALI
on the correct port. You can also send the service pin using the Web interface (see
Section 4.1).
8.
After the service pin has been received, LonMaker commissions the replacement
device.
9.
Repeat steps 1-8 for each CEA-709 node representing one DALI channel.
6.5 Working with Configuration Properties
All application parameters which can be configured via the L-DALI Configurator (see
Section 6.7.6) are available as LonMark configuration properties. The L-DALI
Configurator, on the other hand, directly modifies the values on the device when
downloading its parameters (see Section 6.7.4). However, LNS based tools do not
automatically read back CPs from the devices when browsing them. This can result in
inconsistencies between the actual CP contents on the device and their copy in the network
management tool. It is recommended to synchronize the CPs from the device into the LNS
database before editing and writing them back.
Note:
Always choose Current device values or New Device Values for “Source of CP Values”
when commissioning or replacing a device!
To Synchronize CPs in NL220
1.
Version 2.0.1
Double-click on the device object in the device tree
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
93
LOYTEC
Figure 95: Configuration Tab for Configuration Properties in NL220.
2.
Press the Upload button on the Configuration tab of the device properties (see Figure
95).
To Synchronize CPs in LonMaker TE
1.
Right-click on a device object and select Commissioning  Resync CPs… from the
context menu.
2.
This opens the dialog shown in Figure 96.
Figure 96: Set Configuration Properties in LonMaker TE.
Version 2.0.1
3.
In this dialog select the radio button Upload values from device in the Operation
group box. To use the current settings of the device as default values for new devices,
select Set device template defaults from device.
4.
Execute the operation by clicking the OK button.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
94
LOYTEC
6.6 Enable Legacy NM Mode
For network management tools, which do not support the ECS (enhanced command set)
network management commands, the legacy network management mode must be
configured. Please contact the tool’s vendor for information whether ECS is supported or
not. Note, that changing to legacy network management mode changes the static interface
of the device and thus requires different XIF files.
The legacy mode can be enabled using the Web Interface (see Section 4.2.1) or the System
Settings tab in the Project Settings dialog of the Configurator Software (see Section
6.16.4).
6.7 Using the L-DALI Configurator
6.7.1 Starting as an LNS Plug-In
In LonMaker the plug-in is started by right-clicking on the L-DALI device shape and
selecting Configure… from the pop-up window.
In NL-220, the Plug-in is started by right clicking on the L-DALI node, then selecting the
Option LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator in the PlugIns sub menu.
In Alex, the Plug-in is started by right clicking on the L-DALI device and selecting the
LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator in the Starte PlugIn sub menu.
A window similar to what is shown in Figure 97 should appear.
Figure 97: L-DALI Configurator main window.
6.7.2 Starting Stand-Alone
The L-DALI can also be used without LNS-based tools. In this case, the L-DALI
Configurator needs to be started as a stand-alone application. Go to the Windows Start
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
95
LOYTEC
menu, select Programs, LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator and then click on L-DALI
Configurator. This starts the L-DALI Configurator and DALI Installation tab is displayed.
If the L-DALI is not yet connected to the network, go to the Firmware menu and select the
firmware version of the L-DALI to be configured. If the L-DALI is already connected to the
network it is recommended to connect the configuration software to the L-DALI.
To Connect to an L-DALI Stand-Alone
1.
Select the FTP connection method by clicking on the FTP connect button
in the tool bar of the main connections window. The FTP connect dialog as shown in
Figure 98 opens.
2.
To add a new device connection, click on New or select an existing connection in the
tree on the left-hand side.
3.
Enter the host name or IP address of the device. Enter the admin password. The default
password is ‘loytec4u’ (older firmware versions used ‘admin’).
4.
If your device is located behind a NAT router or firewall, you may change the FTP,
Telnet, and HTTP ports to your needs for accessing the device.
5.
Click on Save to store that connection.
6.
Click on Connect. This establishes the connection to the device.
Figure 98: FTP connection dialog.
6.7.3 Uploading the Configuration
To get the configuration of the L-DALI it needs to be uploaded. This allows uploading the
entire configuration from the L-DALI, including DALI configuration, light and sunblind
application parameters, system settings, AST configuration, and schedules. Optionally, parts
of the configuration can be omitted from upload.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
96
LOYTEC
To speed up configuration upload and download LOYTEC recommends using an IP
connection (FTP). If an IP connection is available the L-DALI Configurator will try to use
it, even if the software was started as LNS Plug-In.
To Upload a Configuration
1.
Click on the upload button
in the tool bar. The configuration upload dialog opens up as shown in Figure 99.
2.
Choose which configuration items shall be uploaded:
Figure 99: Upload Options Dialog.
3.

Datapoint Configuration: Contains everything configured on the Datapoints
tab (see Section 6.10) and in the project settings except for the system settings
(see Section 6.16). Typically this includes local alarm, scheduler, calendar,
and trendlog objects, E-Mail templates, math objects and user registers.

System settings: Contains the configuration setup in the System Settings tab
of the Project Settings (see Section 6.16.4)

Scheduler and calendar patterns: Contains the schedule and calendar
configuration (“contents” of scheduler and calendar objects).

DALI Configuration: Contains configuration of DALI network, including
device names, device types, device assignment (DALI short address), group
names and group assignment as configured on the DALI Installation, DALI
Groups and DALI Channel tabs (see Section 6.7.6).

Parameters: Contains parameters of L-DALI light and sunblind applications as
configured on the Parameters tab (see Section 6.9).
Click on the button Upload Configuration… to start the transfer. This will upload the
selected configuration items. The configuration items not selected for upload will
remain as before the upload.
6.7.4 Configuration Download
After a configuration was created or changed, it needs to be downloaded to the L-DALI. For
doing so, the L-DALI must be online. If the L-DALI is not yet connected to the network, the
configuration can be saved to a project file on the local hard drive.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
97
LOYTEC
To speed up configuration upload and download LOYTEC recommends using an IP
connection (FTP). If an IP connection is available the L-DALI Configurator will try to use
it, even if the software was started as LNS Plug-In.
To Download a Configuration
1.
In the main connections window, click on the Download Configuration speed button
in the tool bar of the main connections window. This will open the configuration
download dialog as shown in Figure 100.
2.
Choose which configuration items shall be:
Figure 100: Download Options Dialog
Tip!
Datapoint Configuration: Contains everything configured on the Datapoints
tab (see Section 6.10) and in the project settings (see Section 6.16). Typically
this includes local alarm, scheduler, calendar, and trendlog objects, E-Mail
templates, math objects and user registers.

System settings: Contains the configuration setup in the System Settings tab
of the Project Settings (see Section 6.16.4)

Scheduler and calendar patterns: Contains the schedule and calendar
configuration (“contents” of scheduler and calendar objects).

DALI Configuration: Contains configuration of DALI network, including
device names, device assignment (DALI short address), group names and
group assignment as configured on the DALI Installation, DALI Groups and
DALI Channel tabs (see Section 6.7.6).

Parameters: Contains parameters of L-DALI light and sunblind applications as
configured on the Parameters tab (see Section 6.9).
To speed up your work flow only download the configuration items changed. In
applications where no AST features are used it is sufficient to download DALI
Configuration and Parameters.
3.
Version 2.0.1

After clicking on OK the Configuration Download dialog appears as shown in Figure
101. Click Start to start the download. Each of the actions is displayed in the Task
List section of the dialog. The current progress is indicated by the progress bar below.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
98
LOYTEC
As new DALI devices are commissioned during the download of the DALI configuration
this operation may take some time depending on the number of DALI devices to be
commissioned.
4.
When the download process has finished, a notification window appears, which has to
be acknowledged by clicking OK. If an error occurred details are available when
clicking on Show Details.
Figure 101: Configuration Download Dialog.
5.
Finally, if the download process included the “Parameters” item it is recommended to
synchronize the L-DALI’s configuration properties with the LNS database (see Section
6.5).
If the dialog shown in Figure 102 appears, the software has detected a version mismatch
between the DALI configuration in the device and the one in the Configurator.
Figure 102: DALI configuration mismatch.
Possible reasons for this message are:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
99
LOYTEC

The DALI configuration on the device was changed using the web interface.

An old configuration file version was loaded to the LDALI Configurator software.

No configuration file was loaded to the LDALI Configurator software but the device
contains a DALI configuration.
If you are sure, you are loading a matching DALI configuration to the device, you can
answer the question by clicking on Yes. In any case the log (“Show details”) will contain
the message “Syncro counter did not match” for each affected channel.
6.7.5 Upload the System Log
The system log on the device contains important log messages. Log messages are generated
for important operational states (e.g., last boot time, last shutdown reason) or errors at runtime. This file is important for trouble-shooting and is available on the Web UI (see Section
4.3.1). The file can also be uploaded from the device with the L-DALI Configurator.
To Upload the System Log
1.
Connect to the L-DALI via the FTP or LNS method (see Section 6.7.2).
2.
Click on the Upload system log button
in the tool bar. The upload system log dialog as shown in Figure 103 opens showing the
upload progress.
Figure 103: Upload system log dialog.
3.
When the upload is finished, click on Show System Log. The system log window
appears as shown in Figure 104.
4.
Click on Save to store the system log into a file on your local hard drive.
Figure 104: System log window.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
100
LOYTEC
6.7.6 Backup and Restore
The Configurator provides a backup and restore function for the connected device. It is
highly recommended to create a device backup once the device configuration has been
completed. This backup can be used in the case a device needs to be replaced in the
network.
To Create a Backup
1.
Connect to the device (see Sections 6.7.1 and 6.7.2).
2.
Choose the menu Tools  Backup Device Configuration ….
3.
A file requestor opens. Choose a location to store the ZIP file of the device backup. The
suggested file name contains device IP address and creation date.
4.
Click on Save. The backup is being uploaded.
To Restore a Backup
1.
Choose the menu Tools  Restore Device Configuration ….
2.
In the file requestor choose a backup ZIP file and click Open.
3.
The Configurator restores and reboots the device. The process is complete when the
device has finished rebooting.
6.8 DALI Installation
To install and manage the DALI channels connected to the L-DALI the tabs DALI
Installation, DALI Groups, and DALI Channels are used:

The DALI Installation tab is used to assign DALI ballasts to Lamp Actuator
objects and DALI sensors to Light and Occupancy Sensor objects. Additionally, a
name can be assigned to each ballast and sensor. For details see Section 6.8.1.

The DALI Groups tab is used to assign ballasts to DALI groups. Additionally, a
name can be assigned to each group. For details see Section 6.8.2.

The DALI Channels tab can be used to virtually connect two DALI channels
(“bridging”). Additionally, a name can be assigned to each channel. For details see
Section 6.8.3.
6.8.1 DALI Installation Tab
The DALI Installation tab is shown in Figure 105. It is used to scan a DALI channel and
assign DALI devices to Lamp Actuator and Light/Occupancy Sensor objects. The dialog is
divided into three sections:
Version 2.0.1

The channel selection and functions section (number 1 in Figure 105).

The DALI network database with the device assignment (number 2 in Figure 105).

The DALI network scan results (number 3 in Figure 105).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
101
LOYTEC
1
3
2
Figure 105: DALI Installation tab.
6.8.1.1
Channel Selection and Functions Section
The following functions are available in on-line and off-line mode:

The drop down box to the left of this section allows you to choose the DALI
channel to work with. The default selection is Channel 1. The number of channels
available depends on the L-DALI model.

The Export and Import buttons allow exporting and importing the DALI
configuration of the selected channel to/from an XML file. This includes DALI
device assignment, device names, group assignment, group names, and the channel
configuration.
If you are online the following additional functions are available:

The Scan Channel button starts a scan of the DALI channel. When pressing the
button a window showing the scan progress will be shown (see Figure 106). After
the scan the devices found will be listed in the DALI network scan results section
(number 3 in Figure 105) of the DALI Installation tab.
Figure 106: DALI channel scan progress.
Note:
Version 2.0.1

Pressing the Reset button will clear the DALI configuration of the selected channel
including all DALI device assignments, device names, group assignment, group
names, and the channel configuration. If on-line it will also reset all DALI devices
on the channel to factory defaults.

The Automatic Status check box allows enabling and disabling the periodic
update of the status of the devices in the DALI network database. Pressing Get
Status allows updating the device status manually if automatic status update is
disabled.
If there is no IP connection available, disable automatic status update in case there is no
need to monitor the status of ballasts and sensors as the status update uses network
bandwidth.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
6.8.1.2
102
LOYTEC
DALI Network Database Section
This section allows naming DALI devices (ballasts and sensors) and assigning them to the
Lamp Actuator and Light/Occupancy Sensor objects on the CEA-709 interface (see Section
7.2). Optionally the DALI device type can be configured for unassigned ballasts. The upper
table contains 64 entries, one for each Lamp Actuator of the channel. The lower table
contains 16 entries, one for each Light and Occupancy Sensor of the channel.
For each entry the tables contain the following columns:

Lamp name: Contains the name of the DALI device. Double click on the name to
modify it. The name should be chosen in a way which allows identifying the lamp
(e.g. room number/ballast number). This is specifically important in off-line work
flow (see Section 6.2.3) for the installer to pick the correct lamp during the final
on-line phase and to identify a lamp if it reports an error.

Type: Show the type and optionally the make of the DALI ballast or sensor
assigned. For assigned and online ballasts this information is read from the ballast.
In case of unassigned ballasts, the DALI device type can be chosen using a dropdown box or Set device type… from the context menu (can be used with multiselect). Selecting the ballast type allows to configure DALI device type specific
parameters during off-line preparation. Further, this information is used during
device assignment when on-line to ensure only a matching device type can be
assigned. For information on the device type reported by a ballast please refer to
the documentation provided by the vendor of the ballast.

Status: Shows the status of the DALI device if a DALI ballast or sensor is assigned
and the DALI configuration was downloaded. If the DALI device is online the
status is OK, if it is not reachable via the DALI network it is Offline. The device is
marked modified if its configuration/assignment was changed, but not yet
downloaded to the L-DALI. If Automatic Status is checked the status is
periodically updated. Press Get Status to manually trigger an update of the Status
column.

Short Addr.: Shows the DALI short address of the device. The DALI short address
can be in the range 0 to 63.

Serial Nr.: Shows the serial number of the device, if available. If the serial number
of the device is known during preparation phase of off-line work flow (see Section
6.2.3) it can be entered by double clicking on this field. In this case the assignment
is automatically performed once the DALI configuration is downloaded to the
L-DALI.
The list can be sorted by clicking on one of the column headers.
A device can be winked by selecting the corresponding row and clicking on the Wink
button located between the DALI network database section and the DALI scan result
section.
6.8.1.3
DALI Network Scan Result Section
If a DALI network scan has been performed by pressing the Scan Channel button, the
unassigned devices found during the scan are displayed in the table in the DALI network
scan result section.
For each entry the tables contain the following columns:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
103
LOYTEC

Short Addr.: Shows the DALI short address of the device. For devices which do
not contain a short address L-DALI automatically assigns one during network scan.

Device: Can be Ballast, Sensor, or Unknown. Unknown devices are devices not
supported by the L-DALI (e.g. switches). See Section 7.4.1 for details on the
different DALI device types.

Type: Show the type and optionally the make of the DALI device.

Serial Nr.: Shows the serial number of the device, if available.
The list can be sorted by clicking on one of the column headers.
Devices found during a DALI network scan can be assigned to Lamp Actuators either one
by one or using the Auto Assign button.
To manually assign a device select one device in the scan results list on the right side and an
unassigned entry in the Lamp Actuator or Sensor objects lists on the left side and press the
Assign button. Alternatively you can drag a device from the scan results list and drop it to
an unassigned entry in the object lists. DALI ballasts must be assigned to Lamp Actuator
objects. DALI sensors must be assigned to Light/Occupancy Sensor objects.
To remove an assignment from an object select the corresponding entry and press the
Unassign button. The entry in the object list will become unassigned again and the DALI
device will be moved to the scan results list to the right.
To identify a device in the scan results list select the corresponding row and click on the
Wink button. The duration of the Wink action can be chosen in the drop down box besides
the button. When a device winks it dims between its minimum and maximum value for the
specified wink duration.
Tip!
Use auto assign if you do not care about the assignment of a specific device. This is
typically the case if you are using the on-line work flow (do not prepare DALI installation
off-line) and you do not use the Lamp Actuator objects to control the lights (rather use
Group or Channel Actuator objects).
6.8.2 DALI Groups Tab
The DALI Groups tab is shown in Figure 107. It is used to assign DALI ballasts to groups
and setup group names.
Similar to the DALI Installation tab the drop down box in the top left corner of the tab
allows you to choose the DALI channel to work with. Below there is a table which contains
one row for each DALI ballast (64) and one column for each DALI group (16). To
add/remove a device to/from a group check/uncheck the check box where the corresponding
row and column are crossing. The default name of a group (e.g. “Group 00”) can be
changed by double clicking on it.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
104
LOYTEC
Figure 107: DALI Groups tab.
6.8.3 DALI Channels Tab
The DALI Groups tab is shown in Figure 108. It is used to change channel names and to
configure DALI channel bridging.
Figure 108: DALI Channels tab.
The default name of a channel (e.g. “Channel 1”) can be changed by double clicking on it in
the first row of the table.
To connect two channels by channel bridging, check the check box where the corresponding
row and column are crossing. For more details on the DALI channel bridging function refer
to Section 7.4.3.
6.9 Parameter Configuration
The parameter configuration is located on the Parameters tab as shown in Figure 109. The
dialog is divided into four sections:
Version 2.0.1

The tree view (number 1),

the LONMARK object list (number 2),

the parameter view (number 3),

and buttons for special functions (number 4).

The selected node in the tree view (1) determines which LONMARK objects are
displayed in the list view (2). If the root node (LDALI-3E104) is selected, all
LONMARK objects are displayed, if a branch is selected, the LONMARK object in or
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
105
LOYTEC
below this branch are displayed. For example, selecting LDALI-3E104/Lamp
Actuators displays all lamp actuator objects on all DALI channels, whereas selecting
LDALI-3E104/Lamp Actuators/Channel 1 displays only lamp actuators of DALI
channel 1.
Figure 109: Parameter Configuration Dialog
In the LONMARK object list (2) one or multiple objects can be selected. The properties of
the selected object(s) are displayed and can be edited in the parameter view (3). In this way
it is possible to change a parameter for multiple objects at once. All parameters are
CEA-709 configuration properties which are described in Section 7.2.
Depending on the selected objects the following special functions (4) are available:

Lamp Actuators: Reset run hours and Energy Count

Light Sensors: Calibrate light sensor

Constant Light Controllers: Calibrate constant light controller

Sunblind Controllers: Modify sunblind controller event priorities, link sunblind
controller to constant light controller
6.9.1 Reset Run Hours and Energy Count
To reset the run hours and/or energy count of a lamp actuator click on the Reset Run
Hours/Energy Count… button. A dialog is displayed which allows you to specify what
you want to reset (see Figure 110).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
106
LOYTEC
Figure 110: Reset Run Hours and Energy Count
6.9.2 Calibrate Light Sensor
To calibrate the light sensor click on the Calibrate Light Sensor … button. The dialog
shown in Figure 111 is opened.
Figure 111: Light Sensor Calibration
To counter any non-linearity the sensor can be calibrated for up to seven different daylight
illumination levels. However, in most cases it is sufficient to calibrate the sensor only once.
The best result is achieved if the illumination level is near the setpoint. To calibrate the
sensor perform the following steps:
1.
Measure the current lux level at the reference area (e.g. desk) using a luxmeter.
2.
Enter the measured lux level in the input field Measured Lux Level.
3.
Select an unused index.
4.
Click on the Calibrate button.
5.
If necessary repeat steps 1.– 4. For different daylight illumination levels.
6.
Press the Done button.
The current gain table can be uploaded from the device by pressing the Upload button. It
can be cleared with the Clear button.
6.9.3 Calibrate Constant Light Controller
To calibrate the constant light controller click on the Calibrate Constant Light Controller
… button. The dialog shown in Figure 112 is opened.
Artificial light calibration
Some light sensors have a different sensibility for artificial light then for natural light. To
compensate for this difference the following steps have to be performed:
1.
Version 2.0.1
Darken the room.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
107
LOYTEC
2.
Switch the lamp off. Measure the lux value on the reference area (e.g. desk) with a
luxmeter and enter it in the first Luxmeter input field. Enter the value measured by the
light sensor in the first Light Sensor input field.
3.
Switch the lamp on. Measure the lux value on the reference area (e.g. desk) with a
luxmeter and enter it in the second Luxmeter input field. Enter the value measured by
the light sensor in the second Light Sensor input field.
4.
Click on the Calibrate button.
Figure 112: Calibrate Constant Light Controller
Gain factor calibration
The gain factor has to be calibrated only if a CEA-709 light sensor is used which cannot be
calibrated. To calibrate the gain factor perform the following steps:
1.
Switch the light off and measure the current lux level at the reference area (e.g. desk)
using a luxmeter.
2.
Enter the measured lux level in the input field Luxmeter.
3.
Enter the value measured by the light sensor in the field Light sensor.
4.
Click on the Calibrate button.
6.9.4 Modify Sunblind Controller Event Priorities
To modify the priority of event which influence the sunblind controller click on the Modify
Sunblind Controller Event Priorities … button. The dialog shown in Figure 113 is
opened. For a description of the different events refer to Section 7.2.9.9.
The button Higher increases the priority of the selected event; the button Lower decreases
the priority.
Events can be disabled with the Remove button. Previously deleted events appear in the
drop-down list and can be enabled by pressing the Add button.
Per default an event which is activated with identical parameters multiple times in
succession will be executed multiple times. For some events (e.g. local control) this default
behavior can be changed by pressing the toggle re-evaluation button. The text “not reevaluated” will appear beside the event and successive identical commands will be ignored.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
108
LOYTEC
To store the modified event priorities press the Modify button. The event priorities can be
reset to the default values by pressing the Reset to default button.
Figure 113: Modify Sunblind Event Priorities
6.9.5 Link Sunblind Controller to Constant Light Controller
To synchronize the lights and sunblinds of a room the sunblind controllers of a room have to
be linked to the room’s constant light controller. When clicking on the Link Sunblind
Controller to Constant Light Controller… button the dialog shown in Figure 114 is
opened. Select a constant light controller and press the Link button.
Figure 114: Link Sunblind Controller to Constant Light Controller.
6.9.6 Configure Emergency Light Auto-Test Calendar
To configure the Auto-Test Calendar of a DALI emergency light click on Configure
Emergency Test Interval & Delay…. This function is only available if the Configurator is
connected to an L-DALI and one or more Lamp Actuator objects are selected, which are
assigned to a DALI ballast of type emergency light. The dialog shown Figure 115 in is
opened.
Figure 115: Configure Emergency Test Interval & Delay.
For both tests – function and duration test – a test interval in days and the time and date of
the next execution of the test can be specified. A Test Interval of 0 disables auto-test of the
selected test. Click Configure to store the new values in the selected devices. Click on
Upload to read the currently configured values from the device.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
109
LOYTEC
The resolution of the duration test interval is 7 days, the resolution of the delay to the next
test execution is 15 minutes. In both cases the value entered will be rounded to the next
appropriate value.
Test results will be stored in the appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4).
6.10 Data Point Manager
The Configurator uses a central concept to manage data points. The data point manager is
located on the Datapoints tab as shown in Figure 116. It is used to select, create, edit and
delete user data points, calendar, scheduler, and trendlog objects, E-Mail templates, alarm
logs, and math objects. The dialog is divided into three sections:

The folder list (number 1 in Figure 116),

The data point list (number 2 in Figure 116),

And a property view (number 3 in Figure 116).
2
1
3
Figure 116: Data Point Manager Dialog.
6.10.1 Folder List
At the left is a list of folders which is used to sort the available data objects by their
category. There are a number of predefined folders available:

Version 2.0.1
L-DALI: This is the device folder of the L-DALI. It contains all the necessary data
points which constitute to the L-DALI’s port interface definition. These data points are
created on the L-DALI when the configuration is downloaded. The subfolders represent
o
System Registers: This folder contains system registers, which provide
information on the device itself.
o
User Registers: This folder holds user-definable registers. These registers are
not visible on the underlying network and are intended for internal usage.
o
CEA709 DALI Channel X: These folders contain data points, schedulers,
calendars, trend logs, and alarm servers of the CEA-709 network technology
representing the different DALI channels. There is one subfolder of this type
for each DALI channel available on the L-DALI device. See Section 6.10.2.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual

110
LOYTEC
Global Objects: This top-level folder contains sub-folders that organize specific
application objects that operate on data points.
o
E-Mail Configuration: This folder contains E-Mail templates. An E-Mail
template defines the destination address and text body of an E-Mail, which is
triggered by data points and may contain data point values or file attachments.
To create an E-Mail template, select the folder and use the context menu (see
Section 6.11).
o
Math Objects Configuration: This folder contains math objects. Math
objects are used to perform a predefined calculation on a number of input data
points and write the result to a defined set of output data points. Each math
object contains one formula. To create a math object, select the folder and use
the context menu (see Section 6.15).
o
Alarm Log Configuration: This folder contains the alarm log objects. Each
alarm log object creates a historical log of alarm transitions of one or more
alarm objects (alarm server or client). To create an alarm log, select the folder
and use the context menu (see Section 6.13.3).
Using the context menu on a folder, sub-folders may be created to organize the available
objects. If new objects are created automatically, they are usually placed in the base folder
and can then be moved by the user to any of his sub-folders. Note, that the folder structure
described above cannot be changed by adding or deleting folders at that level.
6.10.2 Network Port Folders
Each network port folder on the device has the same structure of sub folders. These sub
folders are:

Datapoints: This folder holds all data points, which are allocated on the network port.
As the network variable interface of the L-DALI is fixed this folder is read-only. That
is, new data points cannot be created and existing data points

Calendar: This folder is used to hold a locally available calendar object with its
calendar patterns (definitions of day classes like holiday, maintenance day, and so on).
Current devices allow one local calendar object. To create a calendar, select the folder
and use the context menu (see Section 6.12)..

Scheduler: This folder is used for local scheduler objects. Each of these objects will
map to a local scheduler on the device’s network port. Configuring schedules through
these objects actually transfers schedule configuration data to the underlying scheduler
objects on the network port. To create a scheduler, select the folder and use the context
menu (see Section 6.12).

Alarm: This folder is used for local alarm server objects. Current devices allow one
local alarm server, which is already pre-allocated and cannot be deleted.

Trend: This folder is used for local trend log objects. Each of these objects will be able
to trend data points over time and store a local trend log file. To create a trend log
object, select the folder and use the context menu (see Section 6.14.1).
6.10.3 Data Point List
At the top right, a list of all data objects which are available in the selected folder is shown.
From this list, objects may be selected (including multi-select) in order to modify some of
their properties. Click on the Include Subfolders button to show all data points of the
selected data point folder and all its sub-folders. This can be a convenient way for multiselect across folders. To filter for data point names, enter a search text into the Datapoint
Name Filter text box and hit Enter. A drop-down list holds the previously used filters
available.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
111
LOYTEC
The list can be sorted by clicking on one of the column headers. For example, clicking on
the Direction column header will sort the list by direction. Other columns display data point
name, NV name, and SNVT. To apply the current sort order as the new data point order on
the device, right-click on the column header and select Renumber Datapoints.
Alternatively, select from the menu Tools  Renumber Datapoints.
New objects may be created in the selected folder by pressing the New button to the right of
the list or via the New command in the context menu. A plus
sign in the list indicates
that the data point contains sub-points. These can be structure members for structured
SNVTs. Clicking on the plus
sign expands the view.
For the alarming, scheduling, trending (AST) features, there are columns, which display
icons for data points that are attached to an AST function. See Table 10 for details.
Icon
Data Point Usage
Data point is scheduled
Data point has an active alarm condition
Data point has an inactive alarm condition.
Data point is a trigger for E-Mails
Data point used for trending
Table 10: Icons for used data points in the data point list view.
6.10.4 Property View
When one or multiple data points are selected, the available properties are displayed in the
property view. All properties of data points in the Datapoints folder are read-only and
therefore marked with a lock
sign. When applying multi-select, only those properties
common to all selected data points are displayed. Depending on the network technology and
data point class, different properties may exist.
Data point properties common to all technologies:
Version 2.0.1

Datapoint Name: This is the technology-independent data point name. This name may
be longer than and different to the name of the native communication object (i.e.,
network variable). Data point names must be unique within a given folder. The
maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters.

Datapoint Path: This informational property specifies the entire path of the data point
within the data point hierarchy. The maximum length is limited to 64 ASCII characters.

Datapoint Description: This is a human-readable description of the data point. There
are no special restrictions for a description.

Use Linear Scaling: If this property is enabled, the analog values are pre-scaled from
the technology to the data point. This scaling is in addition to any technology-specific
scaling factors. If enabled, the properties Custom Scaling Factor and Custom Scaling
Offset accept the scaling factors.

Custom Scaling Factor, Custom Scaling Offset: These properties only exist, if linear
scaling is enabled. They apply to analog data points only.

Only notify on COV: This property assists for binary and multi-state input data points.
It defines, if a data point shall trigger an update only when the value changes or on
every write. If this is enabled, consecutive writes with the same value do not trigger an
update. If you want to convey every write, disable COV on the data point.

Persistent: This property defines, if the last written value shall be stored as a persistent
value. Persistent data points restore that value after a restart from the persistent storage.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
112
LOYTEC

Default Value: This property defines a default value. Enter a default value to enable
this feature in the data point. Delete the value entirely to remove the default value. If no
default value is defined, this property reads “N/A”. The default is no default value.

Point Type: This is the base data point type, e.g., “Analog Datapoint”.

Direction: This is the data point direction. Use input or output as directions.

Unit Text: For analog data points this property contains a human-readable text for the
engineering units of the scalar value, e.g., “kilogram”.

Analog Datapoint Max Value: For analog data points this property contains the upper
limit of the supported value range. Note that this does not define an alarm limit.

Analog Datapoint Min Value: For analog data points this property contains the lower
limit of the supported value range. Note that this does not define an alarm limit.

Analog Datapoint Precision: For analog data points this property defines the number
of decimals. ‘0’ specifies an integer value. Display units may use this to format the
floating point value accordingly.

Analog Datapoint Resolution: For analog data points this property defines the
smallest possible value increment.

Analog Point COV Increment: This property is valid for analog input data points. It
specifies by which amount the value needs to change, before an update is generated. If
every write shall generate an update even when the value does not change, specify 0 as
the COV increment. If any value change shall generate an update, delete the value,
which results in Any.

Active Text: For binary data points this property defines a human-readable text for the
active state (true).

Inactive Text: For binary data points this property defines a human-readable text for
the inactive state (false).

State Count: For multi-state data points this property defines the number of discrete
states.

State Text: For multi-state data points this property defines a human-readable state
label for each state.
6.10.5 User Registers
User registers are data points on the device that do not have a representation on the network.
Thus, they are not accessible over a specific technology. A register merely serves as a
container for intermediate data (e.g., results of math objects). Since a register has no
network direction, it can be written and read. Therefore, two data points are generated for
each register, one for writing the register (output) and one for reading the register (input).
To Create a User Register
Version 2.0.1
1.
Select the L-DALI/User Registers folder
2.
Right-click in the data point list and select New Datapoint… in the context menu. This
opens the register creation dialog as shown in Figure 117: Create a user register..
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
113
LOYTEC
Figure 117: Create a user register.
3.
Enter a Datapoint Name for the register. You may leave the Register Name blank to
give the underlying register the same name as the data point.
4.
Select a Type. Available are “Double”, “Boolean”, or “Signed Integer”.
5.
Click Create Register.
6.
Two data points now appear for the register, one for writing the register and one for
reading the register as shown in Figure 118: Manually created user register..
Figure 118: Manually created user register.
6.11 E-Mail Templates
6.11.1 Create an E-Mail Template
E-Mail templates are used to assemble and transmit E-Mails when certain trigger conditions
occur. The E-Mail template contains the destination E-Mail address, the subject, and text.
Variable parameters can be added to the text by using data point sources. The transmission
of an E-Mail is triggered by one or more trigger data points. For setting up E-Mails, the
E-Mail account information has to be configured on the device, e.g., on the Web UI (see
Section 4.2.7).
To Create an E-Mail Template
Version 2.0.1
1.
Under the Global Objects folder, select the E-Mail Configuration sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select New E-Mail Template … from the context menu.
3.
In the Configure E-Mail Template dialog, which is shown in Figure 119 enter the To
address and the Subject. Optionally, Cc and Bcc addresses can be specified.
4.
Enter text in the E-Mail Text multi-line field.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
5.
114
LOYTEC
If the E-Mail text shall contain values of data points, add data points to the Data
Sources list by clicking the Add… button.
Figure 119: Configure E-Mail Template Dialog.
6.
A data point selector dialog opens. Select one or more data points and click OK. The
selected data point appears in the Data Sources list.
7.
Select the data point in the Data Sources list. In the drop-down box underneath select
Selected Data Source Value and click the Paste to Text button.
8.
A place holder %{v1} for the data point value appears now in the E-Mail text.
9.
To replace an existing data source select the data point in the Data Sources list and
click the Replace … button. This opens a data point selector dialog for choosing the
replacement data point.
6.11.2 Trigger E-Mails
E-Mail templates are used to assemble and transmit E-Mails when certain trigger conditions
occur. For an E-Mail template, one or more trigger conditions can be defined. The E-Mail
will be sent, when one of the trigger conditions is activated. Depending of the trigger data
point type, the trigger conditions can be refined.
Note, that the behavior of the trigger data point is influenced by the COV properties of the
data point. If the Only notify on COV property is checked, the data point triggers only if its
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
115
LOYTEC
value changes to the value of the trigger condition. If that property is not checked, the data
point triggers on every write with a value that matches the trigger condition.
The trigger for sending an E-Mail can be enabled or disabled altogether by using an enable
data point. This data point must be of type binary. If the value of that enable data point is
TRUE, the trigger conditions are evaluated. If the value of the enable is FALSE, no E-Mails
are be triggered.
To Create an E-Mail Trigger
Note:
1.
Under the Global Objects folder, select the E-Mail Configuration sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select Configure E-Mail Template … from the context menu.
3.
Change to the Mail Triggers tab.
Of course, you can also change directly to the Mail Triggers tab when creating an E-Mail
template.
4.
Click the Add… button. A data point selection dialog opens.
5.
Select one or more data points and click OK.
6.
The triggers appear now in the Mail Triggers list. The data points that serve as E-Mail
triggers also appear with the E-Mail icon
in the data point list.
7.
In the Manage Trigger Conditions you can setup the trigger condition depending on
the trigger data point class.
8.
If the trigger condition is depending on the value of an enabling data point, you can add
an enable data point by clicking on the
button.
9.
To remove such a trigger enable, click the Remove Enable Trigger button.
6.11.3 Attachments
E-Mail templates can be configured to have file attachments. Basically, any file of the
device can be specified as an attachment.
To Configure Attachments
Version 2.0.1
1.
Under the Global Objects folder, select the E-Mail Configuration sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select Configure E-Mail Template … from the context menu.
3.
Change to the Attachments tab.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Note:
116
LOYTEC
Of course, you can also change directly to the Attachments tab when creating an E-Mail
template.
4.
Select an available file from the Attach File drop-down box.
5.
Click the Add button. The file appears in the Attachments list.
6.
To remove an attachment, select the attachment file in the Attachments list and click
the button Remove.
6.11.4 Limit E-Mail Send Rate
The transmission of E-Mails is triggered by the configured trigger conditions. It is not
predictable, how often the trigger condition will cause the transmission of an E-Mail. The
E-Mail template can be configured to limit the number of transmitted E-Mails. This is done
in the Configure E-Mail Template dialog.
To configure an E-Mail Rate Limit, configure the settings:

Max. E-Mails per day: This setting defines how many E-Mails can be sent on average
per day. The actual number of transmitted E-Mails on a specific day may be slightly
higher than this setting, depending on burst rates. The default is 100 E-Mails per day.
This results in an average interval of one E-Mail per 14 minutes.

Send burst count: This setting defines how many E-Mails may be transmitted shortly
after each other not limited by the above average interval. After the burst count, the
average mails per day limit takes effect. The default is a maximum of 20 E-Mails in a
row.
6.12 Local Schedule and Calendar
6.12.1 Create a local Calendar
As the first step, the required data points must be created. A calendar must be created, if the
schedules shall work with exception days, such as “Holidays”. If it suffices for schedules to
define daily schedules for normal weekdays only, no calendar needs to be created.
To Create a local Calendar
Version 2.0.1
1.
Under the port folder, select the Calendar sub-folder to create a calendar.
2.
Right-click in the data point list view and select New local Calendar ….
3.
In the Create New Calendar dialog box (as shown in Figure 120) enter Name and
Description of the calendar. Correct the effective period if necessary.
4.
Click Create Calendar. The calendar appears now in the data point list view.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
117
LOYTEC
Figure 120: Create New Calendar dialog box.
6.12.2 Create Calendar Pattern
When a local calendar is used, it needs to be configured with calendar patterns. A calendar
pattern represents a class of days such as “Holidays”. The calendar patterns can then be used
in a schedule to define daily schedules for exception days. The available calendar patterns
should be created when the system configuration is engineered. The actually dates in the
calendar patterns can be modified later at run-time.
To Create a Calendar Pattern
1.
Select an existing calendar data point.
2.
Right-click and select Create Calendar Pattern…
3.
Enter a Pattern Name in the Create Calendar Pattern dialog
4.
Click Create Pattern. The dialog closes and the calendar pattern appears beneath the
calendar data point.
6.12.3 Create a Local Scheduler
For scheduling data points, a scheduler object must be created. Under each port folder,
multiple local scheduler objects can be created. These local schedulers can then be
configured to schedule data points.
To Create a Local Scheduler
Version 2.0.1
1.
Under the port folder, select the Scheduler sub-folder to create a scheduler.
2.
Right-click in the data point list view and select New Local Scheduler ….
3.
Enter a name for the schedule and a description. Note, that the schedule automatically
detects a calendar, if it has previously been created.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
4.
118
LOYTEC
Click Create Schedule. The new schedule appears in the data point list of the
Scheduler sub-folder.
6.12.4 Configure Scheduled Data Points
When a local scheduler has been created, it needs to be configured, which data points it
shall schedule. This is done by attaching data points to the scheduler. Note, that there may
be limits, how many and which data points may be attached (see Section 6.12.10).
This configuration must be done as an initial setup. The daily schedules can be changed
later in the Web UI or over the network. Which data points are scheduled can be changed in
the Web UI.
To Attach Data Points to a Scheduler
Tip!
Version 2.0.1
1.
Select the scheduler data point in the Scheduler sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select Configure Schedule from the context menu. The same dialog
which appears when a new scheduler is created is shown and allows configuring the
scheduler. Of course, this step can also be done directly when the data point is created.
3.
Select the tab Scheduled Datapoints.
4.
Click the button Attach Datapoints. This opens another data point selector window.
5.
Select the data points to attach and click OK. For each of the attached data points, one
or more lines appear in the list below the attach button. If the attached point is a
structure, there will be one line for each element of the structure.
Data points can also be attached to a scheduler by selecting a data point in the data point
manager, drag it onto a scheduler data point and drop it on the scheduler data point.
6.
Enter a short text in the Description field in the second column of each line. This text
will serve as a label, which will be shown on the device’s UI to identify the data point.
7.
Add new value presets by entering a name and pressing the Create button next to the
input field.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Tip!
119
LOYTEC
To generate presets automatically for multi-state data points, click the Auto-Create button.
This button is available, if no other presets have been defined yet.
8.
For each new preset, a new column will appear in the list. In this column, enter the
desired value for each of the attached points, which will be set when this value template
is scheduled. The user may later edit the values for each preset on the device but cannot
add new value presets unless there is only one line (one value) in the list.
9.
If there are multiple output values which belong together, they can be grouped in order
to save space on the device. For each group, the entered value is stored only once, even
if there are more data points in the same group.
10. When done with the point and value setup, switch back to the Configuration tab or
click Save Changes to leave the dialog.
Tip!
A shortcut to creating a scheduler object and attaching a data point is to select a data
point in the data point manager, right-click on it and choose Schedule Datapoint from the
context menu. This generates a scheduler and links that data point to it.
6.12.5 Configure Daily Schedules
Once a scheduler is configured with attached data points and value presets, the daily
schedules can be defined. This can be done on the device or over the network at run-time, or
also in the configuration software. A daily schedule defines the time and value sequences in
a 24-hour period starting at 00:00 and ending at 23:59 hours. For each weekday a daily
schedule can be configured.
In addition, daily schedules can be configured for exception days from a calendar, such as
“Holidays”. An exception day always overrides a normal weekday. If more than one
exception day is used, a priority must be assigned. This is necessary so that the system
knows which schedule to follow on a day which matches more than one calendar pattern.
To Configure a Daily Schedule
Version 2.0.1
1.
Open the Configure Schedule dialog and click on the Configuration tab (see Section
6.12.4).
2.
Select the day for which to configure a daily schedule.
3.
Select a value preset in the Available Data Presets box on the upper right-hand side.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
120
LOYTEC
4.
Drag and drop the preset from this list into the time table area to define the desired
output values on the day schedule.
5.
Completed daily schedules may be copied to other days using the Copy to button. For
example, the Monday may serve as the template for a regular work day and be copied to
Tuesday till Friday. Then click OK.
To Use Exception Days
Version 2.0.1
1.
Select a calendar pattern, which shall be used as an exception day and place a
checkmark on it.
2.
Edit the daily schedule.
3.
If more than one calendar pattern is used, edit the priorities. For example, if a given
calendar day falls in both categories, “Holidays” and “Maintenance”, the exception day
with the higher priority becomes effective on that day. The highest available priority is
marked highest. Note that the actual priority values depend on the technology (see
Section 6.12.10).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Important!
121
LOYTEC
Choose different priorities for different exceptions. If two exceptions are valid for a given
day and their priorities are equal, it is not determined, which exception is in effect.
6.12.6 Configure Exception Days
When a local calendar is used, its calendar patterns need to be configured with exception
days (pattern entries). The calendar patterns can be configured in the L-DALI Configurator
software or be modified at run-time over the Web UI or over the network. When configuring
in the software, the current exception days should be uploaded from the device, to work on
the current configuration.
To Configure Exception Days in a Calendar Pattern
1.
Click on the Upload Configuration button
in the tool bar of the main connections window. Click OK when the upload is finished.
2.
Select the Calendar sub-folder and select the calendar pattern, which shall be
configured
Figure 121: Configure Calendar Pattern Dialog.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
Tip!
122
LOYTEC
3.
Right-click and select Configure Pattern … in the context menu.
4.
The Configure Pattern dialog appears as shown in Figure 121. Add dates to the
calendar pattern by entering a Date Configuration. Then click Add Entry. The date
appears in the Pattern Entries list on the right-hand side.
5.
Edit an exception by selecting the pattern entry in the Pattern Entries list. Then
modify the date configuration in the Date Configuration group box.
6.
Click Save Changes when all exception days have been entered.
If not sure, how a date configuration affects the calendar days, click on a pattern in the
Pattern Entries list and the affected days will be highlighted in the Preview.
6.12.7 Configure Embedded Exceptions
Besides exception days of the calendar, special exception days can be embedded into the
scheduler. These embedded exception days are not visible or accessible in other scheduler
objects.
To Configure an Embedded Exception
1.
Open the Configure Schedule dialog to configure daily schedules as described in
Section 6.12.4.
2.
Click on the Create button below the Weekly/Exception Schedule Configuration list
3.
The Create Pattern dialog opens. You can enter exactly one pattern entry for the
embedded exception. It is recommended to choose a descriptive name for the day, e.g.
‘24_12’xx’ for every 24th of December.
4.
Click Create Pattern. The embedded exception is now available.
6.12.8 Configure Control Data Points
A scheduler object can be configured to use special control data points. An enable/disable
data point can be configured, which enables or disables the scheduler depending on its
Boolean value. An enable/disable feedback data point is updated with the current enabled
state of the scheduler. This also reflects and an enable from the network. The Preset Name
data point can be attached to be updated with the name of the currently active preset.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
123
LOYTEC
To Configure Control Data Points
1.
Open the Configure Schedule dialog to configure daily schedules as described in
Section 6.12.4.
2.
Go to the Scheduled Datapoints tab.
3.
In the Control Datapoints group box, click the
data point. A data point selection dialog opens.
4.
Select a matching data point and click OK. For the preset name a string data point
must be selected.
5.
To remove an undesired control data point, click on the Remove button.
button to add the desired control
6.12.9 Using the Local Scheduler
Once the setup of the local scheduler is done, it is basically operational. It will immediately
start to work based on the configuration data downloaded through the configuration
software. You can verify the daily schedules and values of scheduled data points on the
Web UI (see Section 4.2.15). The local schedule can be altered over the Web UI or over the
network using the underlying networking protocol.
6.12.10
Limitations for Local CEA-709 Schedulers
CEA-709 schedulers and the CEA-709 calendar adhere to the LONMARK standard objects.
For CEA-709, certain restrictions exist that need to be kept in mind. Attached data points
can either represent an entire NV or individual elements of a structured NV. CEA-709
schedulers may have several different groups of data points attached, i.e., the value preset
may consist of more than one element. For example, a CEA-709 scheduler might schedule a
SNVT_temp and a SNVT_switch and have 3 elements in each value preset as depicted in
Figure 122.
Figure 122: Example value presets in CEA-709 schedulers.
Priorities of exception days in a CEA-709 scheduler range from 0 (the highest) to 126 (the
lowest). The value 127 is reserved as a default for weekdays.
Further, the implementation as LONMARK standard objects requires the use of configuration
properties. If the number of CEA-709 schedulers or their capacities for daily schedules and
value presets is changed, the resource and static interface of the CEA-709 port changes.
However, since the L-DALI port interface is static increasing the capacities is not possible
in this case. When downloading a project, the software verifies if sufficient resources have
been configured. If it detects a problem, the user is notified.
6.13 Local Alarming
6.13.1 Create an Alarm Condition
To generate alarms from data points, intrinsic reporting is used. For each data point an
alarm condition must be defined. This condition employs an intrinsic algorithm to generate
alarms based on the data point’s value. Depending on the data point type (analog, binary,
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
124
LOYTEC
multi-state), different conditions are defined. The alarm is reported to the attached alarm
server.
To Create an Intrinsic Alarm Condition
1.
Select a data point.
2.
Right-click and select Create Alarm Condition… from the context menu.
3.
For an analog data point, the dialog as shown in Figure 123 appears. Select the Alarm
Server. Optionally, enter an Alarm Description. If left empty, the description of the
data point is used. Enter a Time Delay, after which the condition is evaluated. Select
Low Limit and High Limit and put check marks, if they shall be employed. Enter a
Deadband to account for hysteresis.
Figure 123: Alarm Condition for an Analog Data Point.
Version 2.0.1
4.
For enable, dead band, low limit and high limit data points can be attached by clicking
the
button. Those data points are used by the device to determine the actual values
at run-time.
5.
For a binary data point, the dialog as shown in Figure 124 appears. Select the Alarm
Server. Optionally, enter an Alarm Description. If left empty, the description of the
data point is used. Enter a Time Delay, after which the condition is evaluated. Select
the Alarm Value which triggers the alarm.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
125
LOYTEC
Figure 124: Alarm Condition for a Binary Data Point.
6.
For enable, a data point can be attached by clicking the
button. This data point is
used by the device to determine the actual values at run-time.
Figure 125: Alarm Condition for a Multi-State Data Point.
Version 2.0.1
7.
For a multi-state data point, the dialog as shown in Figure 125 appears. Select the
Alarm Server. Optionally, enter an Alarm Description. If left empty, the description
of the data point is used. Enter a Time Delay, after which the condition is evaluated.
Select the Alarm States, which triggers the alarm, by clicking the arrow buttons.
8.
For enable, a data point can be attached by clicking the
button. This data point is
used by the device to determine the actual values at run-time.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
9.
126
LOYTEC
Click on Create. In the alarm column, the alarm sign
points that have an alarm condition.
will be added for those data
6.13.2 Deliver Alarms via E-Mail
Updates in the alarm summary of an alarm object can be used as a trigger to send E-Mail.
For setting up E-Mails, the account information has to be configured on the device, e.g., on
the Web UI (see Section 4.2.7). Then an E-Mail template can be created and the alarm point
attached as a trigger.
To Create an E-Mail Template for Alarms
1.
Create or configure an E-Mail template as described in Section 6.11.1.
2.
Change to the Mail Triggers tab.
3.
Click the Add… button and select an alarm data point.
4.
In the Mail Triggers list select the added trigger data point.
5.
In the Manage Trigger Conditions list put a check mark on alarm conditions that
shall invoke the transmission of the E-Mail.
6.
Change to the Common E-Mail Properties tab.
7.
Add the alarm data point as a data source and insert the place holder into the E-Mail
text as described in Section 6.11.1.
6.13.3 Create an Alarm Log
The alarm objects on the device contain an alarm summary (live list) of currently active and
acknowledge-pending alarms. As soon as an alarm becomes inactive and has been
acknowledged, it disappears from the alarm summary. To store a historical log of alarm
transitions an alarm log needs to be created.
An alarm log can log transitions of one or more alarm objects. Its size is configurable. The
alarm log is a ring buffer. As soon as its size limit is reached, the oldest alarm log records
are overwritten by new alarm transitions.
To Create an Alarm Log
1.
Version 2.0.1
Under the Global Objects folder, select the Alarm Log Object Configuration subfolder.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
127
LOYTEC
2.
In the data point list right-click and select New Alarm Log … from the context menu.
3.
In the Create New Alarm Log dialog enter a Name for the alarm log. Optionally enter
a Description.
4.
Enter a Log Size, which defines how many transitions are resident in the alarm log.
5.
Define a percentage for Fill Level Notification, which can be used to trigger the
transmission of E-Mails.
6.
Click on the button Add… on top of the Logged Alarm Objects list.
7.
A data point selector dialog opens. Select one or more alarm objects that shall be
logged and click OK. The alarm objects appear in the list.
8.
Click Create to create the alarm log object.
6.13.4 Limitations for CEA-709 Alarm Servers
Local CEA-709 alarming supports only one alarm server object. This alarm server object is
represented by the device’s LONMARK node object and facilitates the SNVT_alarm2 output
network variable. Acknowledging alarms in the alarm server is adhering to the LONMARK
specification and relies on the RQ_CLEAR_ALARM mechanism.
Note:
On the L-DALI the alarm server object is pre-allocated for each interface. It is called
“Local Alarms”.
6.14 Local Trending
6.14.1 Create a Local Trend
The value of a data point can be logged over time. This is referred to as trend data. To
generate trend data a trend object has to be created. The trend data is stored in a data logger
file. This file can be downloaded via FTP in binary or CSV format (see Section 7.1.2).
CEA-709 trend objects can generate trend logs for multiple data points and can be operated
in one of three basic modes:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
128
LOYTEC

Interval Mode: In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged into the
data logger file.

COV Mode: In this mode, each of the trended data points is logged separately, if and
only if its value changes. For analog data points, a specific COV increment can be
configured in the data point configuration properties of the trended data point.

Trigger Mode: In this mode a snapshot of all trended data points is logged each time a
trigger condition fires. The trigger condition is applied to a trigger data point.
To Create a Trend Object
1.
Under the port folder, select the Trend sub-folder to create a trend log object.
2.
Right-click and select New Trend … from the context menu.
3.
In the Create New Trend Object dialog (shown in Figure 126) enter a name and
optionally a description for the trend log object.
Figure 126: Basic Trend Object Configuration.
Version 2.0.1
4.
Select the desired Trend Mode.
5.
Select the Log Size. The display in the dialog will adapt the estimations for needed
data logger file size in KB and duration of the trend log. Alternatively, for interval
trends, the estimated log duration and log interval can be edited.
6.
Select a Fill Level Notification percentage. This will decide at which fill-level trigger
will fire. A fill-level trigger can be used to trigger the transmission of an E-Mail (see
Section 6.14.5).
7.
Click Save Changes to store the basic configuration of the trend object. The new trend
log object appears in the data point list of the Trend folder.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
129
LOYTEC
6.14.2 Configure Trended Data Points
When a local trend object has been created, it needs to be configured, which data points it
shall log. This is done by attaching data points to the trend object. Only simple data points
can be attached for trending, i.e., of class analog, binary, or multi-state. For trend log
objects in the CEA-709 technology, multiple data points can be attached for trending.
The trending can be enabled/disabled on behalf of an enable data point. This data point
should be of type binary. If the value of that enable data point is TRUE, the trend object
logs data as defined by the trend mode. If the value of the enable is FALSE, trending is
disabled. If no enable data point is configured, the trend log is always enabled.
To Attach Data Points for Trending
Tip!
Tip!
Version 2.0.1
1.
Select the trend object in the Trend sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select Configure Trend from the context menu. The same dialog
which appears when a new trend object is created is shown and allows configuring the
trend object. Of course, this step can also be done directly when the object is created.
3.
Add data points to be trended. Click on Add … which opens a data point selector
window.
4.
Select the data points and click OK. For each of the attached data points, a line appears
in the list below the add button. The trended data points will also appear with the trend
icon in the data point manager.
Data points can also be attached to a trend by selecting a data point in the data point
manager, drag it onto a trend object and drop it on the trend object.
5.
Data points can be removed from the trend by clicking Remove.
6.
If COV mode was selected, the COV increment is displayed in the COV delta column.
This value can be increased to produce less trend data. Note, that it cannot be lowered
under the trended data point’s own COV increment. Go to the data point configuration
to change the COV increment in this case.
7.
If the trended value of the data point shall be aggregated over the log interval, select the
desired aggregation in the Type column. Available options are Min, Max, Avg.
For creating multiple curves with min, average, and maximum values, add the same data
point three times and select the different aggregation types.
8.
In addition, a special Trend Enable data point can be selected. If configured, the trend
log will only log data, if the value of this data point evaluates true, i.e., is not zero.
Click the … button to select a data point.
9.
To remove the enable data point, click the Remove button.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
130
LOYTEC
10. When done with the data point setup, click Save Changes to leave the dialog.
Tip!
A shortcut to creating a trend log object and attaching a data point is to select a data
point in the data point manager, right-click on it and choose Trend Datapoint from the
context menu. This generates a trend log and links that data point to it.
6.14.3 Trend Triggers
Local trend objects in CEA-709 can be operated in trigger mode. In this mode, one or more
trigger data points cause the generation of a snapshot containing the values of the trended
data points at the time instant the trigger is activated. For a trend object, one or more trigger
conditions can be defined. Depending on the trigger data point type, the trigger conditions
can be refined.
Note, that the behavior of the trigger data point is influenced by the COV properties of the
data point. If the Only notify on COV property is checked, the data point triggers only if its
value changes to the value of the trigger condition. If that property is not checked, the data
point triggers on every write with a value that matches the trigger condition.
To Configure Trigger Data Points for Trending
Note:
1.
Select the trend object in the Trend sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select Configure Trend from the context menu.
3.
Change to the Triggers tab.
Of course, you can also change directly to the Triggers tab when creating a trend object.
4.
Click the Add… button. A data point selection dialog opens.
5.
Select one or more data points and click OK.
6.
The triggers appear now in the Trend Triggers list.
7.
In the Manage Trigger Conditions you can refine the trigger condition depending on
the trigger data point class.
8.
When done with the data point setup, click Save Changes to leave the dialog.
6.14.4 Download Trend Data in CSV Format
Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP in CSV format (see Section 7.1.2).
The CSV contents are generated on-the-fly from the internal binary storage when accessing
the file. Each trend log point has one CSV file. The files are located in
/data/trend/TrendLogName_UID.csv
Where TrendLogName is the data point name of the trend (Trend Name). The UID is the
unique ID of the trend log object. The UID can be obtained from the ID column in the data
point list of trend log data points as shown in Figure 127. This would result in the trend
CSV file ‘/data/trend/out_temp_107C.csv’.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
131
LOYTEC
Figure 127: UID of data points.
Because the contents are generated on-the-fly, the file size in the FTP client will appear as 0
Bytes. The decimal point and CSV column separator can be configured in the system
configuration of the Web UI (see Section 4.2.1). Note, that for a comma “,” as the separator,
the decimal point is a point. This is useful for English/U.S. applications. For countries that
use the comma as the decimal point, select the semicolon as the CSV separator.
6.14.5 Deliver Trend Data via E-Mail
Trend logs can be downloaded from the device via FTP. This requires an active action by
the user. Alternatively, trend data can be sent as an E-Mail attachment. For doing that, an
E-Mail template has to be setup for the trend log to be transmitted. The fill-level condition
in the trend object can be used as a trigger to send an E-Mail with the trend’s data logger
CSV file as an attachment.
For setting up E-Mails, the account information has to be configured on the device, e.g., on
the Web UI (see Section 4.2.7). Then an E-Mail template can be created and the trend
object attached as a trigger.
To Create an E-Mail Template for Trends
Note:
1.
Create or configure an E-Mail template as described in Section 6.11.1.
2.
Change to the Mail Triggers tab.
3.
Click the Add… button and select a trend object.
4.
In the Mail Triggers list, the added trigger data point appears with the Fill Level
condition.
5.
Change to the Attachments tab.
6.
Select the trend log CSV file of the trend object in the Attach File drop-down box and
click Add.
ZIP versions of the CSV files are also available. Select those to save transmission
bandwidth and mailbox space.
7.
Click OK to complete the E-Mail template configuration.
6.14.6 Limitations for Local CEA-709 Trends
Local CEA-709 trend objects support trending multiple data points in all trend modes,
interval, COV, and trigger. The enable data point is also supported. All data points can be
NVs, registers or of any other technology. There is no LONMARK object linked to the trend
object. Consequently, trend data cannot be accessed over a LONMARK mechanism.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
132
LOYTEC
6.15 Math Objects
6.15.1 Create a Math Object
Math objects are advanced application objects that can execute mathematical operations on
data points. A math object takes a number of input data points (variables v1, v2, …, vn) and
calculates a result value according to a specified formula. When configuring a math object,
the input data points, output data points and the formula must be configured by the user.
Input data points can be configured with a change-of-value condition, to trigger the math
calculation only if the value changes more than a certain delta.
To Create a Math Object
Version 2.0.1
1.
Under the Global Objects folder, select the Math Object sub-folder.
2.
Right-click and select New Math Object … from the context menu.
3.
In the Create New Math Object dialog, enter a name and optionally a description for
the math object.
4.
Attach input data points by clicking the Add Input DP button.
5.
In the data point selector dialog, select the input data points and click OK. The data
points appear as v1, v2, etc.
6.
If the data point shall trigger the math calculation only after a certain change-of-value,
enter a value into the COV delta column.
7.
Select the input data point and click Add Variable to push the variable on the
evaluation stack.
8.
Select a function to be applied on the variables and click the Add Function button.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
9.
133
LOYTEC
The resulting formula is displayed at the bottom of the dialog. Alternatively, the
formula can be entered there.
10. Add output data points by clicking the Add Output DP button.
11. In the data point selector dialog select the output data points and click OK.
Note:
On the L-DALI only user registers can be used as output data points of a math object.
12. To create the math object click Create.
6.15.2 Editing a Math Object
Math objects can be edited once created. The formula can be changed, new variables added,
or additional output data points added.
To Edit a Math Object
1.
Under the Global Objects folder, select the Math Object sub-folder.
2.
Select the math object in the data point list.
3.
Right-click and select Configure Math Object … from the context menu.
4.
Edit the math object as described in Section 6.15.1.
5.
To replace an input data point by another input data point without re-writing the entire
formula, click the Replace Input DP … button. This opens a data point selector dialog.
Select the replacement data point there.
6.
To detach an input data point click the Detach Input DP button. This leaves the
respective variable slot empty.
7.
To finalize the edit click on Save Changes.
6.16 Project Settings
The project settings allow defining certain default behavior and default settings used
throughout the project. To access the project settings go to the menu Settings  Project
Settings…. This opens the project settings dialog, which provides several tabs as described
in the following sections.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
134
LOYTEC
6.16.1 General
The general tab of the project settings as shown in Figure 128 contains settings independent
of the technology port. The settings are:

Project Name: This setting allows entering a descriptive name for the project.

Device Configuration Download Default: This group of settings defines, how the
download of device configuration parameters shall proceed. If Download only data
point configuration is selected, the configuration download does not download
anything else than the data point configuration. If Ask is selected, the download will
pop up a dialog in which the user can choose what to download. If Download specific
is selected, the project settings of this dialog determine what is downloaded onto the
device.
Figure 128: General Project Settings.
6.16.2 CEA-709 Settings
The CEA-709 configuration tab as shown in Figure 129 allows configuring properties of the
device’s CEA-709 port. The options are:

Important!
Downloading the data point configuration after changing the interface, will result in a
new static interface! As a result, the device might not be reachable via LNS anymore!
Thus, it is highly recommended to change this option only before the device was
commissioned in LNS.

Version 2.0.1
Interface: This drop-down box allows selecting the static LonMark interface of the
CEA-709 nodes. In addition to the standard L-DALI network interface, an interface
with additional network variables for emergency light applications is available. See
Section 7.2.
Configuration Download: This group box contains self-configuration settings for the
CEA-709 ports. This is necessary if the device shall be used without being
commissioned by a network management tool. For each CEA-709 node the subnet/node
and domain information can be configured. Set the check mark and enter the CEA-709
domain and subnet/node information. Note, that the domain must match the nodes’
domain on the network and the subnet/node address must not be used by another
device.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
135
LOYTEC
Figure 129: CEA-709 Project Settings.
6.16.3 CEA-709 AST Settings
For CEA-709 devices, the use of alarming, scheduling, and trending (AST) features requires
additional resources (functional objects, CPs and NVs). As changing those resources will in
turn change the static interface – which is not supported for the L-DALI – the L-DALI
comes with a preconfigured AST resource configuration, which cannot be changed. This tab
contains the following options and settings, which are relevant to calendar and scheduler
functionality of the device:
Figure 130: CEA-709 AST Project Settings.
Version 2.0.1

Enable Calendar Object: This checkbox enables a LONMARK compliant calendar
object on the device. It is always enabled.

Enable Scheduler Objects: This checkbox enables local LONMARK compliant
scheduler objects on the device. It is always enabled

Number of calendar patterns: Specifies the maximum number of different exception
schedules (day classes like holiday, maintenance day) supported by this calendar
object.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
136
LOYTEC

Total number of date entries: Specifies the maximum number of date definitions
which may be stored by the calendar. This is the sum of all date definitions from all
calendar entries. A date definition is for example a single date, a date range, or a week
and day pattern.

Number of local schedulers: This is the number of local scheduler objects which
should be available on the device. Each local scheduler data point created in the data
point manager will connect to one of these scheduler objects. There may be more
scheduler objects available on the device than are actually used at a certain time. It is a
good idea to have some spare scheduler objects ready, in case another scheduler is
needed.

Number of daily schedules: This is the maximum number of schedules supported by
each scheduler object. This number must at least be 7, since a scheduler always needs
to provide one schedule for each day of the week (default weekly schedule). For each
special day defined by the calendar or embedded exception day, an additional daily
schedule is required to support it.

Entries in Time/Value table: This is the total number of entries in each scheduler
defining a value template that should apply on a specific day starting at a specific time
(the time table).

Number of value templates: This is the maximum number of value templates
supported by each scheduler.

Data size per value template: This specifies the buffer size reserved to hold the data
for each value template. More data points or bigger data structures require a bigger
value buffer.

Max. number of data point maps: Specifies the maximum number of individual data
points that this scheduler is able to control.

AST Configuration Size: This number in Bytes is calculated from the scheduler
settings above and represents the total size of the LONMARK configuration properties
file stored on the device. While certain settings can be freely edited within the given
limits, the resulting configuration size is also limited.
As can be seen from the above list, it is not easy to configure a LONMARK scheduler object.
There are many technical parameters which need to be set and which require some
knowledge of how these scheduler objects work internally. Therefore, the configuration
software provides the following mechanisms to help in choosing the right settings:

Resources required by the current project: The absolute minimum settings required
by the current project are shown in a table at the left side of the window. This data may
be used to fill in the values at the right side, but some additional resources should be
planned to allow for configuration changes which need more resources.
6.16.4 System Settings
This tab is shown in Figure 131. It is available only with the newest firmware version and
can be used to configure the device through the Configurator. In the configuration tree on
the left-hand side the user can select certain groups of settings, e.g. Web server settings. The
dialog displays the settings of the selected group in the dialog area. The structure is similar
to the menu structure on the Web UI.
Enable the legacy mode if this is required by your network management tool (see Section
6.6).
Under the port configuration tree, the user can enable or disable communication protocols
on the device’s ports. Enabled protocols are marked with a checkmark. Click on the
checkmark and toggle it. Note, that depending on the device model communication
protocols on other ports may be disabled.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
137
LOYTEC
The IP address settings cannot be changed in this dialog. The FTP server cannot be disabled
in this dialog, either. This ensures that the Configurator can maintain connection to the
device.
Figure 131: Device Configuration Settings
The Upload button can be used to get the current device settings from the device and
display them in this dialog. The Download button can be used to explicitly transfer the
settings from this dialog onto the device.
Important!
Version 2.0.1
After downloading the device settings from this dialog the changes will be visible
immediately on the Web UI but the device needs to be rebooted to let the changes take
effect.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
138
LOYTEC
7 Operating Interfaces
7.1 Common Interface
7.1.1 Schedule and Calendar XML Files
The daily schedule and calendar pattern configuration can be changes at run-time over the
Web UI or the network. An alternate way to change that configuration is to download a
schedule and calendar XML file via FTP onto the device. After the file has been
downloaded, the new configuration becomes effective immediately. The device does not
need to be rebooted. The files are located in
/tmp/uid/sched/UID.xml
/tmp/uid/cal/UID.xml
The UID is the unique ID of the data point. The UID can be obtained from the ID column in
the data point list as shown in Figure 127. A schedule data point with UID 107C would
result in the schedule XML file ‘/tmp/uid/sched/107C.xml’. The UID remains
constant for the life time of the data point even when the name or description is changed.
The content of the XML file must be compliant to the scheduleCfg schema. This schema
can be found at the LOYTEC Web site. The XML documents can refer to the target
namespace ‘http://www.loytec.com/xsd/scheduleCfg/1.0/’.
7.1.2 Trend Log CSV File
The CSV file format for a trend log and the location of those files are defined in this section.
The trend log CSV files are accessible either via their UID only, or in combination with
contents of the trend log object name. The files are located in
/tmp/uid/trend/UID.csv
/data/trend/Datapointname_UID.csv
The UID is the unique ID of the data point. The UID can be obtained from the ID column in
the data point list as shown in Figure 127. For a more user-friendly listing of the files, the
Datapointname contains the trend log’s object name. It is truncated after 23 ASCII
characters to fit the requirements of the file system. A trend CSV file for the trend object
‘trend0’
and
the
UID
‘107C’
would
result
in
the
CSV
file
‘/data/trend/trend0_107C.csv’. The UID remains constant for the life time of the
object even when the name is changed.
The CSV file format for a trend log is defined in this section. The CSV file starts with a
header, containing at least the first line, which specifies the CSV format (log_csv_ver). The
current version is 2. The next line contains the field log_device. It has trailing fields that
specify the vendor, product code, firmware version and device ID string. The Device ID
String can be one of the following: (IP) 192.168.24.100, (BACnet Device) 224100,
(CEA-709 NID) NID.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
139
LOYTEC
The log_info line specifies the fields UID and name of the trend log object. The line
log_create has two fields specifying the date and time when this CSV log was generated.
The line log_capacity has two fields: the current number of log entries in the file and the log
capacity.
Following are one or more lines of log_item. Each line specifies a trended data point. The
first field is the index, the second the ID of the logged data point, the third the data point
name. The data point name can be augmented by engineering units in square brackets. Log
entries in the CSV refer to the item index to identify the data point, for which the entry was
logged.
#log_csv_ver;2
#log_device;LOYTEC;Product Code;Firmware Version;Device ID String; Serial No
#log_info;Log-ID;Log Name
#log_create;YYY-MM-DD;HH:MM:SS
#log_capacity;filled;capacity
#log_item;index;UID;data point name [units]
After those lines any number of comment lines starting with a hash character ‘#’ are
allowed. One line contains the column headings. Lines that are not comments specify one
log record per line, using the column information as described below. The columns are
separated by commas ‘,’ or semi-colons ‘;’. If commas are used as a separator, the decimal
point must be a point ‘.’. If semi-colons are used, the decimal point must be a comma ‘,’.
There are as many value columns as value sources specified in the header. If at a given
date/time more values are logged, all of them appear in the same line. If at that given time
some sources did not log values, those columns are left empty.
Column
Field
Example
Description
A
Sequence Number
50
The log record sequence number. This is the
monotonously increasing sequence number, which is
unique for each log record.
B
Source
0
Data point source identifier. Indexes into logger_entry
header. For value lines in a multi-column CSV, this
field indexes the first column, which has a value. For
the ERROR record type, the field indexes the data
source that caused the error. For LOGSTATE,
TIMECHANGE records this field is not applicable and
can be left at zero.
C
Record Type
2
The record type: LOGSTATE (0), BOOL (1), REAL (2),
ENUM (3), UNSIGNED (4), SIGNED (5), NULL (7),
ERROR (8), TIMECHANGE (9)
D
Error/Time
Change/Log
Status
1
This field is valid for records of type ERROR,
TIMECHANGE, and LOGSTATUS.
E
Date/Time
2007-11-02 15:34:22
The date/time of the log record. This is in the format
YYYY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.
F
Value 0
24,5
Logged value from source 0 or empty
G
Value 1
200
Logged value from source 1 or empty
…
…
…
Value n – 1
5000
Logged value from source n – 1 or empty
Table 11: Columns of the Trend Log CSV File
There are as many value columns as value sources specified in the header. If at a given
date/time more values are logged, all of them appear in the same line. If at that given time
some sources did not log values, those columns are left empty. The “Source” column in a
multi-value CSV refers to the first data source that supplied a value in a given line.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
140
LOYTEC
7.1.3 Alarm Log CSV File
The historical alarm logs are also accessible as CSV-formatted files. The alarm log CSV
files are accessible either via their UID only, or in combination with contents of the alarm
log object name. The files are located in
/tmp/uid/allog/UID.csv
/data/allog/Alarmlogname_UID.csv
The UID is the unique ID of the alarm log object. The UID can be obtained from the ID
column in the data point list of the alarm log folder, similar to obtaining the UID of trend
log objects. For a more user-friendly listing of the files, the Alarmlogname contains the
alarm log’s object name. It is truncated after 23 ASCII characters to fit the requirements of
the file system. A trend CSV file for the alarm log object ‘alarmlog0’ and the UID ‘100C’
would result in the CSV file ‘/data/allog/alarmlog0_100C.csv’. The UID
remains constant for the life time of the object even when the name is changed.
The CSV format of the alarm log CSV file is identical to the trend log CSV format as
described in Section 7.1.2.
7.1.4 Emergency Light Test Log CSV File
When an emergency light test is performed the results are logged. These logs are available
as CSV-formatted files. There is a log file for each group and one for each channel, which
contains entries from emergency lights not assigned to a group. The files are located in
/tmp/app/grp<chnl><grp>_emerg_tst.csv
/tmp/app/chl<chnl>_emerg_txt.csv
Example: /tmp/app/grp104_emerg_tst.csv contains the log information generated by all
emergency lights assigned to group 4 on channel 1, /tmp/app/chl1_emerg_tst.csv contains
the log information generated by all emergency lights on channel 1 assigned to no group.
The logs contain information on all tests, no matter whether they were triggered using the
nviEmergTest (see Section 7.2.5.6), the Web Interface (see Section 4.2.11.3), or it was
automatically started by the ballast itself due the configured auto-test calendar (see Section
4.2.11.6).
Logs can be downloaded using FTP or attached to E-Mail templates (see Section 6.11.3).
7.2 CEA-709 Interface (LDALI-3E10X only)
Depending on the L-DALI device type 1 (LDALI-3E101), 2 (LDALI-3E102), or 4
(LDALI-3E104) DALI channels are supported. Each DALI channel is implemented as a
separated CEA-709 node. Every one of these up to four CEA-709 nodes is a full grown
CEA-709 node, including its own unique node id (“Neuron ID”), network address, network
variable tables etc. However, all these nodes share one common physical network
connection (see Section 3.8).
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
The L-DALI can be used with different static network interface configurations:
Standard: This is the default static network interface of the L-DALI. Use this interface configuration if you do
not need any specific features offered by the other static network interface configurations.
Emergency: This static interface provides some additional network variables, which might be required in
applications with emergency lights.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
141
LOYTEC
The interface configuration can be chosen via the Project Settings in the Configurator
Software (see Section 6.16.2). Since changing the interface configuration will result in a
change of the static interface it must be changed before commissioning in LNS (see Section
6.2.5).
7.2.1 Node Object #0000
The L-DALI provides a node object conforming to the LONMARK guidelines for each DALI
channel.

The Node Object accepts the following commands via nviRequest: RQ_NORMAL,
RQ_UPDATE_STATUS, RQ_REPORT_MASK, RQ_ENABLE, RQ_DISABLE,
RQ_UPDATE_ALARM, RQ_CLEAR_ALARM, RQ_RESET, RQ_CLEAR_RESET

LONMARK alarming is supported via nvoAlarm (SNVT_alarm) and nvoAlarm_2
(SNVT_alarm_2). This allows devices supporting the LONMARK alarm notifier profile
to receive alarms generated by the L-DALI and react with a defined action (e.g., send
an email). By supporting both alarm SNVTs, SNVT_alarm and SNVT_alarm_2, legacy
and state-of-the-art alarm handling is supported.

nviDateEvent (SNVT_date_event), nvoDateResync (SNVT_switch): If not bound, the
local calendar is used. If a global calendar shall be used, both of these NVs must be
bound to the respective NVs of the global calendar object.

nviTimeSet (SNVT_time_stamp): When writing to this NV, the system is set, if the
configure time-source is “LonMark” or “Auto” (see Section 4.2.1). The time value is
interpreted as local time.

nvoSystemTemp (SNVT_temp): This NV can be used to poll the system temperature of
the L-DALI. It does not send updates and must be polled.

nvoSupplyVolt (SNVT_volt): This NV can be used to poll the supply voltage of the
L-DALI. It does not send updates and must be polled.

nvoIpAddress (SNVT_str_asc): This NV can be used to poll the IP address of the
L-DALI. It does not send updates.

nciEarthPos (SNVT_earth_pos): This configuration property can be used to set the
earth position of the L-DALI. It has been implemented as an NV to make other devices
send that configuration to the L-DALI over the network (e.g., from a GPS device).
7.2.2 Real-Time Keeper Object #3300
The L-DALI includes one standard LONMARK real-time keeper object for each DALI
channel. The Real-Time Keeper Object is used to synchronize the system time of multiple
LonMark compliant devices.
The object has the following network variables:

nvoTimeDate (SNVT_time_stamp): Propagates the devices current system time and
date (local time). It is typically bound to the nviTimeSet input network variable of the
node objects of the LonMark compliant devices, which are synchronized with the
system time of the L-DALI. The update rate of the nvoTimeDate can be configured
using the configuration property SCPTupdateRate (default every 60 seconds).
7.2.3 Calendar Object #0006
The L-DALI includes one standard LONMARK calendar object for each DALI channel.
7.2.4 Scheduler Object #0007
The L-DALI includes 16 standard LONMARK scheduler objects for each DALI channel.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
142
LOYTEC
7.2.5 Lamp actuator Object #3040
There are three different types of the lamp actuator object:

Lamp actuator object: related to DALI lamp (64 per channel)

Group actuator object: related to DALI group (16 per channel).

Channel actuator object: related to the DALI channel (1 per channel).
Lamp Actuator #3040
nviLAValue
SNVT_switch
nviLAValueFb
SNVT_switch
nviLAOverride
SNVT_switch
nviLARunHours*
SNVT_elapsed_tm
nviLABattCharge*
SNVT_lev_percent
nciLocation
nciRunHrInit
nciEnCntInit
nciGroups
nciOnDelay
nciOffDelay
nciAutoOffDelay
nciAutoOffRestart
nciAutoOffBreak
nciOffWarningDly
nciMinLevel
nciMaxLevel
nciPowerUpLev
nciSysFailurLev
nciFadeRate
nciFadeTime
nciNominalPwr
nciDaliCfg
* only available if Emergency interface is enabled
Figure 132: Lamp Actuator Object
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
143
LOYTEC
Group Actuator #3040
nviGPValue
SNVT_switch
nviGPValueFb
SNVT_switch
nviGPSetting
SNVT_setting
nvoGPRunHours
SNVT_elapsed_time
nviGPOverride
SNVT_switch
nvoGPEnergyCnt
SNVT_elec_kwh
nviGPScene
SNVT_scene
nvoGPFailure
SNVT_switch
nviEmergTest
SNVT_switch
nvoPowerOff
SNVT_switch
nvoBatteryCharge
SNVT_lev_percent
nciLocation
nciOnDelay
nciOffDelay
nciAutoOffDelay
nciAutoOffRestart
nciAutoOffBreak
nciOffWarningDly
nciEmTestDelay
nciEmTestValue
Figure 133: Group Actuator Object
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
144
LOYTEC
Channel Actuator #3040
nviCHValue
SNVT_switch
nvoCHValueFb
SNVT_switch
nviCHSetting
SNVT_setting
nvoCHRunHours
SNVT_elapsed_time
nviCHOverride
SNVT_switch
nvoCHEnergyCnt
SNVT_elec_kwh
nviCommand
UNVT_dali_cmd
nvoCHFailure
SNVT_switch
nvoLampFailure
SNVT_state_64
nvoManOverFb
SNVT_switch
nvoBallastFail*
SNVT_state_64
nvoLampFail*
SNVT_state_64
nvoBatteryFail*
SNVT_state_64
nvoFuncTestFail*
SNVT_state_64
nvoFuncTestFail*
SNVT_state_64
nciLocation
nciOnDelay
nciOffDelay
nciAutoOffDelay
nciAutoOffRestart
nciAutoOffBreak
nciOffWarningDly
nciBurnInTime
* only available if Emergency interface is enabled
Figure 134: Object for channel
7.2.5.1
Control
The L-DALI offers different methods to control lamps. All network variables described
below have the same priority. This means that the last network variable update determines
the state of the lamp.
Individual Control
Each lamp can be controlled individually via the switch input network variable nviLAValue
of the lamp actuator object. Any new value received is transmitting to the corresponding
DALI lamp in fading mode (configuration property nciFadeTime is used).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
145
LOYTEC
Group Control
Lamps belonging to a group can be controlled together by the following network variables
of the group actuator object.

nviGPValue: This network variable has the same functionality as nviLAValue but
controls a whole group. Any new value received is transmitting to the DALI lamps
in the group using fading mode (configuration property nciFadeTime is used).

nviGPSetting: Using this input network variable of type SNVT_setting dimming
devices can change the brightness relatively. By function = SET_UP or function =
SET_DOWN the light is dimmed relatively by the amount defined in the
corresponding setting field. By function = SET_STOP ongoing fades are stopped.
When the light is switched off by function = SET_OFF, the last light level is saved
temporarily. When the light is switched on again (function = SET_ON) the
remembered light level is restored. An absolute light level can be set by function =
SET_STATE. The corresponding setting field defines the target light level. The
light value is changed in ramping mode (configuration property nciFadeRate is
used).

nviGPScene: Using this input network variable of type SNVT_scene up to 16
DALI scenes can be saved and recalled. The command SC_LEARN stores the
current light levels of all lamps of the group in the specified scene number. By a
SC_RECALL command previously stored scenes can be recalled. Scenes can be
deleted by a SC_RESET command. When a new scene is selected the lamp values
are adjusted in fading mode (configuration property nciFadeTime is used).
Channel Control
All lamps on the same DALI channel can be controlled together by the following network
variables of the channel actuator object.
7.2.5.2

nviCHValue: This input network variable works in the same way as nviLAvalue
and nviGPvalue but affects all lamps on a channel.

nviCHSetting: This input network variable works in the same way as
nviGPSetting but affects all lamps on a channel.
Maximum and Minimum Light Level
For a dimmable lamp the maximum and minimum light level of a lamp can be configured
via the configuration properties nciMinLevel and nciMaxLevel of type SNVT_switch.
For a non-dimmable lamp set nciMinLevel = nciMaxLevel = 100%.
7.2.5.3
Timing Parameters
Figure 135 shows the behavior of the lamp actuator if the light is switched on/off via one of
the switch (nviLAValue, nviGAValue, nviCHValue) or via one of the setting input network
variables (nviGASetting, nviCHSetting). When the ON command is received, the lamp is
switched to the specified value after the time nciOnDelay has expired. When the lamp is
already on and a new ON command is received the lamp is switched to the new value
immediately. If the lamp is on and an OFF command is received the lamp is switched off
after the time nciOffDelay.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
146
LOYTEC
Figure 135: Timing Parameters
For staircase lighting an automatic cutoff can be configured in nciAutoOffDelay as shown
in Figure 136. When this time expires, the lamp switches off automatically. To warn the
user that the light is going to turn off, an off-warning delay (nciOffWarningDly) can be
configured. During this time the light is dimmed to 50% of the previous level. For nondimmable lights (nciMinLevel=nciMaxLevel) the light is blinking.
Figure 136: Timing Parameters with nciAutoOffDelay and nciOffWarningDly
The behavior of the auto-off timer can be modified with the two configuration properties
nciAutoOffRestart and nciAutoOffBreak. If nciAutoOffRestart is set to ST_ON, the auto-off
timer can be restarted by a new ON command (see Figure 137). If nciAutoOffBreak is set to
ST_ON the auto-off timer can be stopped before the time has expired by switching the light
off via one of the applicable input network variables (see Figure 138).
Figure 137: Timing Parameters (nciAutoOffRestart=ST_ON)
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
147
LOYTEC
Figure 138: Timing Parameters (nciAutoOffBreak=ST_ON)
7.2.5.4
Prioritized Control
Lamp values can be overridden by the following network variables:

nviLAOverride: This input network variable of type SNVT_switch overrides the
value of nviLAValue.

nviGPOverride: This input network variable of type SNVT_switch overrides the
value of nviGPValue, nviGPSetting, and nviGPScene.

nviCHOverride: This input network variable of type SNVT_switch overrides the
value of nviCHValue and nviCHSetting.
If nviXXOverride is valid (.state=0/1) it controls the lamp/group/channel output. Updates of
on the non-priorized input network variables (see Section 7.2.5.1) are ignored. If
nviXXOverride is set to invalid (.state=-1) control of the lamp/group/channel output is
returned to the non-priorized input network variable.
The light value is changed in fading mode (configuration property nciFadeTime is used).
Prioritized control commands are not affected by the timing parameters described in Section
7.2.5.3.
7.2.5.5
Feedback
The lamp object, group object and channel object each report the current state via a
feedback variable of type SNVT_switch:

nvoLAValueFb: lamp object feedback

nvoGPValueFb: group object feedback

nvoCHValueFb: channel object feedback
The channel object reports if it is in manual override mode via the network variable
nvoManOverFb.
7.2.5.6
Emergency Lights
The L-DALI supports testing of emergency lights using its CEA-709 interface. The test is
started and stopped by using the network variable input nviEmergTest, which is available in
each Group Actuator object. To start the test the state part of the SNVT_switch must be set
to SW_ON (1). The value part selects one of the following tests:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
148
LOYTEC
Function test (value = 1%): Starts the function test of all DALI emergency lights in this group, which support
this function. For details on the DALI emergency lighting function test see IEC 62386-202. If the Emergency
interface is enabled the nvoFuncTestFail will show whether the last function test performed has failed (see
below).
Duration test (value = 2 %): Starts the duration test of all DALI emergency lights in this group, which support
this function. For details on the DALI emergency lighting duration test see IEC 62386-202. If the Emergency
interface is enabled the nvoDurTestFail will show whether the last duration test performed has failed (see below).
Mains test (value = 100%): Typically used in a central battery system, to verify lights are dimmed to the
emergency level when mains fail. When the test is started via nviEmergTest, the power of the emergency lamps is
cut by setting the switch network variable output nvoPowerOff to ON. After the delays nciEmTestDelay, the
value of all lamps in the group is compared to the reference value specified in nciEmTestValue. If a lamp does
not reach the reference value (dim value above or below reference value) or if a lamp is offline, an alarm is
generated as shown in Figure 139.
Test results will be stored in the appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4). To
abort any active test the SNVT_switch must be set to {SW_OFF, 0%}. To periodically
execute tests a scheduler controlling nviEmergTest can be configured. See Section 6.12.3 on
how to configure a scheduler.
Figure 139: Emergency Light Test Alarm
If the interface configuration Emergency is selected the following additional, emergency
light related network variables are available:
nvoLARunHour (Lamp Actuator): Report run-hours per ballast.
nvoLABattCharge (Lamp Actuator): Report battery charge per emergency light ballast (if ballast supports it).
nvoBatteryFail (Channel Actuator): Report battery failure for each emergency light ballast.
nvoFuncTestFail (Channel Actuator): Report whether last function test failed for each emergency light ballast.
nvoDurTestFail (Channel Actuator): Report whether last function test failed for each emergency light ballast.
7.2.5.7
Status Monitoring
The L-DALI monitors the DALI lamps and reports any failure in the output network
variables nvoGPFailure (group object) and nvoCHFailure (channel object).
A lamp failure is reported if either
Version 2.0.1

bus power for the related DALI channel fails,

the DALI ballast is not reachable via the DALI channel, or
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual

149
LOYTEC
the DALI ballast reports a failure (e.g. lamp failure) in its DALI status register.
The value of the network variable nvoGPFailure of the group object reflects the percentage
of failed ballasts in this group.
The value of the network variable nvoCHFailure of the channel object reflects the
percentage of failed ballasts in this channel.
The network variable nvoLampFailure of type SNVT_state_64 reports the status of the all
lamps in a channel. Each bit corresponds to the lamp with the same index. In case of a
failure the bit is set.
7.2.5.8
Statistics
The L-DALI reports the run hours and energy consumptions of the DALI lamps.
Run Hours
The L-DALI determines how long each DALI lamp was switched on. If a lamp is replaced
the run hours can be initialized via the configuration property nciRunHrInit of the lamp
object. To limit the number of network variables the run hours are reported not separately
for each lamp but for a whole group or channel.
The group object reports the maximum run hours of all lamps in the groups via the output
network variable nvoGPRunHours.
The channel object reports the maximum run hours of all lamps on the channel via the
output network variable nvoCHRunHours.
Energy Consumption
The L-DALI device can calculate the energy consumption of the DALI lamps. For that
purpose it needs to know the nominal power of all connected DALI lamps. If the
configuration property nciNominalPwr of the lamp object is set to 0 (AUTO), the L-DALI
tries to obtain the energy consumption from the DALI device. However, not all DALI
ballasts support this proprietary extension. In this case the nciNominalPwr has to be
configured with the nominal power of the ballast. The energy consumption can be
initialized via the configuration property nciEnrgyCntInit of the lamp object.
To reduce the number of network variables the energy consumption is reported not
separately for each lamp but for a whole group or channel. The group object reports the sum
of energy consumed by all lamps in the groups via the output network variable
nvoGPEnergyCnt. Equally the network variable nvoCHEnergyCnt reports the sum of
energy consumed by all lamps on the channel.
7.2.5.9
Burn-In Function
Some lamps require a burn-in time during which they must not be dimmed. The burn-in
mode can be activated by setting the nviCommand network variable of the channel object to
START_BURN_IN. The burn-in time is defined by the configuration property
nciBurnInTime. During this time the lamps will only be switched to on (100%) or off (0%)
but not dimmed. To abort the burn-in mode prematurely nviCommand can be set to
STOP_BURN_IN.
7.2.5.10 Fail Safe Functions
The light level a lamp adopts after power-up is defined in the configuration property
nciPowerUpLev.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
150
LOYTEC
The light level a lamp adopts in case of a DALI system failure is defined in the
configuration property nciSysFailureLev.
7.2.5.11 Input Network Variables
nviXXValue
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value: 0..100%
.state: 0, 1
On:
Off:
.state = 1 and .value > 0
.state = 0 and .value=any or .state=1 and .value = 0
Default Value
-
Description
Used to control the lamp/group/channel. This input is effective only if nviXXOverride.state is
invalid (-1).
If an update is received on this network variable the corresponding DALI lamp/group/channel is
dimmed in fading mode (constant time, configuration property nciFadeTime is used).
Lamp actuator only: If an invalid value is received, the lamp adopts the level defined by the
nciSysFailurLev.
nviXXSetting
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function: SET_OFF, SET_ON, SET_UP, SET_DOWN, SET_STATE
.setting: 0..100%
Default Value
-
Description
Used to control the group/channel. This input is effective only if nviXXOverride.state is invalid
(-1).
Function
Description
SET_UP,
SET_DOWN
The light is dimmed relatively by the amount defined in the .setting
field.
SET_STOP
Stop an ongoing fade.
SET_OFF
The light is switched off and the last light level is saved temporarily.
SET_ON
The light is switched on to the light level saved at the time of the last
SET_OFF command.
SET_STATE
Set the light to the level defined by the .setting field.
The light is dimmed in ramping mode (constant rate, configuration property nciFadeRate is used).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
151
LOYTEC
nviXXOverride
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
Default Value
-
Description
If nviXXOverride is valid (.state=0/1), the current lamp/group/channel output is saved temporarily
and the lamp/group/channel output is set to the specified value.
0..100%
0, 1, -1
If nviXXOverride is set to invalid (.state=-1), the lamp/group/channel output is set to the
previously saved value.
The light is dimmed in fading mode (constant time, configuration property nciFadeTime is used).
nviGPScene
Type
SNVT_scene
Valid Range
.function: SC_LEARN, SC_RECALL, SC_RESET
.scene_number: 1..16
Default Value
-
Description
Using this input network variable up to 16 DALI scenes can be saved and recalled.
Function
Description
SC_LEARN
Stores the current light levels of all lamps of the group in the
specified scene number.
SC_RECALL
Recall a previously stored scenes.
SC_RESET
Delete a scene.
When a new scene is selected the lamp values are adjusted in fading mode (configuration property
nciFadeTime is used).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
152
LOYTEC
nviEmergTest
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
Default Value
-
Description
Used to start the test of emergency lamps in a group. To start the test the state part of the
SNVT_switch must be set to SW_ON (1). The value part selects one of the following tests:
Function test (value = 1%): Starts the function test of all DALI emergency lights in this
group, which support this function. For details on the DALI emergency lighting function test
see IEC 62386-202. If the Emergency interface is enabled the nvoFuncTestFail will show
whether the last function test performed has failed.
0..100%
0, 1
Duration test (value = 2 %): Starts the duration test of all DALI emergency lights in this
group, which support this function. For details on the DALI emergency lighting duration test
see IEC 62386-202. If the Emergency interface is enabled the nvoDurTestFail will show
whether the last duration test performed has failed.
Mains test (value = 100%): Typically used in a central battery system, to verify lights are
dimmed to the emergency level when mains fail. When the test is started via nviEmergTest,
the power of the emergency lamps is cut by setting the switch network variable output
nvoPowerOff to ON. After the delays nciEmTestDelay, the value of all lamps in the group is
compared to the reference value specified in nciEmTestValue. If a lamp does not reach the
reference value (dim value above or below reference value) or if a lamp is offline, an alarm is
generated as shown in Figure 139.
Test results will be stored in the appropriate emergency light test log (see Section 7.1.4). To abort
any active test the SNVT_switch must be set to {SW_OFF, 0%}.
nviCommand
Type
UNVT_dali_cmd
Valid Range
.cmd:
START_BURN_IN=0, STOP_BURN_IN=1
.data.type: BALLAST=0, GROUP=1, CHANNEL=2
.data.index: 0..63
Default Value
-
Description
Used to start and stop the burn-in mode.
Version 2.0.1
Function
Description
START_BURN_IN
Start the burn-in mode for a ballast, group, or channel. The burn-in
time is defined by the configuration property nciBurnInTime.
STOP_BURN_IN
Abort the burn-in mode.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
153
LOYTEC
7.2.5.12 Output Network Variables
nvoXXValueFb
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value: 0..100%
.state: 0, 1
On:
Off:
.state = 1 and .value > 0
.state = 0 and .value=any or .state=1 and .value = 0
Default Value
-
Description
Feedback value of the lamp/group/channel object.
For a lamp actuator object this value is the current state and percentage of level intensity of the
corresponding DALI ballast. The .state part is –1 (invalid) if the ballast is not present.
For a group actuator or channel actuator object this value changes, whenever all ballasts of the
group/channel adopt the same dim vale.
nvoXXRunHours
Type
SNVT_elapsed_tm
Valid Range
.day:
.hour:
.minute:
.second:
Default Value
-
Description
Reports the run (ON) hours.
0..65534
0..23
0..59
0..59
L-DALI calculates the run hours of each DALI ballast.
The network variable nvoGPRunHours reports the maximum run hours of the lamps in a group.
The network variable nvoCHRunHours reports the maximum run hours of the lamps in a channel.
The network variable nvoLARunHours reports the run hours of each lamp. This network variable
is only present if the Emergency interface is enabled (see Section 7.2). To reduce the number of
network variables, the value is not available as a network variable on the Standard interface.
If a lamp is replaced the run hours of a lamp can be initialized using the configuration property
nciRunHrInit. If the ballast is capable of maintaining the run hours by itself (e.g. some DALI
emergency lights), resetting the run hours via nciRunHrInit will also reset the run hours counter in
the ballast.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
154
LOYTEC
nvoXXEnergyCnt
Type
SNVT_elec_kwh
Valid Range
0..65534
Resolution: 1kWh
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the energy consumption of a group or channel.
L-DALI calculates the energy consumption of each DALI ballast. To reduce the number of
network variables, the calculated value is not available as a network variable on the lamp actuator
object but is used to calculate the total energy consumption for the group and channel actuator
objects.
The network variable nvoGPEnergyCnt reports the total energy consumption of all lamps in a
group.
The network variable nvoCHEnergyCnt reports the total energy consumption of all lamps in a
channel.
The nominal power of a lamp can be configured using the configuration property nciNominalPwr.
The energy consumption of a lamp can be initialized with the configuration property
nciEnCntInit.
nvoXXFailure
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the status of the lamps in a group or channel.
0..100%
0, 1, -1
The network variable nvoGPFailure reports the percentage of failed ballasts in a group.
The network variable nvoCHFailure reports the percentage of failed ballasts in a channel.
A ballast failure is reported if either

Bus power for the related DALI channel fails,

The DALI ballast is not reachable via the DALI channel, or

The DALI ballast reports a failure (e.g. lamp failure) in its DALI status register.
nvoPowerOff
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable is used during the emergency light test to cut the power.
0, 100
0, 1
The power is cut with an ON value (100.0, 1) and reapplied with an OFF value (0.0, 0).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
155
LOYTEC
nvoLampFailure
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the status of the ballasts in the channel.
Each bit corresponds to the lamp with the same index. In case of a failure the bit is set. A failure
occurs if the corresponding ballast is offline or if it indicates a lamp failure or a ballast failure.
nvoBatteryCharge, nvoLABattCharge
Type
SNVT_lev_percent
Valid Range
-163.840..163.830
Resolution: 0.005
Default Value
-
Description
Reports the battery charge of a self-contained emergency light or a group of self-contained
emergency lights (if supported by the emergency light).
The network variable nvoBatteryCharge reports the minimum battery charge of the emergency
lights in a group.
The network variable nvoLABattCharge reports the battery charge of each self-contained
emergency light. This network variable is only present if the Emergency interface is enabled (see
Section 7.2). To reduce the number of network variables, the value is not available as a network
variable on the Standard interface.
nvoManOverFb
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0, 100
0, 1, -1
On:
Off:
Auto:
.state=1 and .value=100
.state=0 and .value=0
.state=-1 and .value=0
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the current state of manual override for a channel.
nvoBallastFail
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the status of the ballasts in the channel.
Each bit corresponds to the ballast with the same index. In case the ballast indicates a ballast
failure the bit is set.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
156
LOYTEC
nvoLampFail
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the status of the lamps in the channel.
Each bit corresponds to the ballast with the same index. In case the ballast indicates a lamp failure
the bit is set.
nvoBatteryFail
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the battery status of the self-contained emergency lights in the
channel.
Each bit corresponds to the ballast with the same index. In case the ballast indicates a battery
failure the bit is set. Note, that this function is not supported by all types of self-contained
emergency lights.
nvoFuncTestFail
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the result of the last function test performed by each self-contained
emergency light in the channel.
Each bit corresponds to the ballast with the same index. In case the ballast indicates a failed
function test the bit is set. Note, that this function is not supported by all types of self-contained
emergency lights.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
157
LOYTEC
nvoDurTestFail
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit63:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable reports the result of the last duration test performed by each self-contained
emergency light in the channel.
Each bit corresponds to the ballast with the same index. In case the ballast indicates a failed
duration test the bit is set. Note, that this function is not supported by all types of self-contained
emergency lights.
7.2.5.13 Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
nciLocation
Type
SCPTLocation (SNVT_str_asc)
Valid Range
31 ASCII characters
Default Value
Lamp X/Group X/Channel X
Description
This configuration property can be used to specify the name of the lamp/group/channel.
nciRunHrInit
Type
SCPTrunHrInit (SNVT_elapsed_tm)
Valid Range
.day:
.hour:
.minute:
.second:
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property is used to store, set or reset the initial value of the run hours counter
nvoRunHours (only for lamp actuator objects).
0..65534
0..23
0..59
0..59
nciEnCntInit
Type
UCPTenrgyCntInit (SNVT_elec_whr_f)
Valid Range
0..3.40282E38 Wh
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property is used to store, set or reset the initial value of the energy counter
nvoEnergyCnt (only for a lamp actuator objects).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
158
LOYTEC
nciGroups
Type
UCPTgroups (SNVT_state)
Valid Range
.bit0:
…
.bit15:
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the group membership of a lamp. Each bit corresponds to the
group of the same index. If the bit is set, the lamp is member of the group.
nciOnDelay
Type
UCPTonDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property determines the delay after which the lamp value output is switched
on.
nciOffDelay
Type
UCPTOffDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property determines the delay after which the lamp value output is switched
off.
nciAutoOffDelay
Type
UCPTautoOffDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
0s means disabled (no delay)
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property determines the delay after which the lamp output is switched off
automatically. The timer is started after receiving a lamp ON command via the nviXXValue or
nviXXSetting network variable inputs.
The configuration properties nciAutoOffRestart and nciAutoOffBreak modify the
auto-off timer.
Version 2.0.1
ehavior of the
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
159
LOYTEC
nciAutoOffRestart
Type
UCPTautoOffRestart (SNVT_lev_disc)
Valid Range
ST_ON, ST_OFF
Default Value
ST_OFF
Description
This configuration property determines if the auto off timer can be restarted by an ON command
via the nviXXValue or nviXXSetting network variable inputs.
Function
Description
ST_ON
While the auto-off timer is running, the timer can be restarted by an
ON command via the nviXXValue or nviXXSetting network variable
inputs.
ST_OFF
While the auto-off timer is running, all ON command via the
nviXXValue or nviXXSetting network variable inputs are ignored.
nciAutoOffBreak
Type
UCPTautoOffBreak (SNVT_lev_disc)
Valid Range
ST_ON, ST_OFF
Default Value
ST_OFF
Description
This configuration property determines if the auto off timer can be aborted prematurely by an OFF
command via the nviXXValue or nviXXSetting network variable inputs.
Function
Description
ST_ON
While the auto-off timer is running, the timer can be aborted
prematurely by an OFF command via the nviXXValue or
nviXXSetting network variable inputs.
ST_OFF
While the auto-off timer is running, all OFF command via the
nviXXValue or nviXXSetting network variable inputs are ignored.
nciOffWarningDly
Type
UCPToffWarningDly (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
0s means disabled (no delay)
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the time during which the user will be notified that the light
will be switched off shortly. During this time, the light is dimmed to 50% of the current level.
Lamps which cannot be dimmed (nciMinLevel = nciMaxLevel) blink during this time.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
160
LOYTEC
nciMinLevel
Type
UCPTminLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
0.1%
Description
This configuration property specifies the minimum dim level of a lamp. Corresponds to the DALIRegister MIN LEVEL.
nciMaxLevel
Type
UCPTmaxLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
100%
Description
This configuration property specifies the maximum dim level of a lamp. Corresponds to the
DALI-Register MAX LEVEL.
nciPowerUpLev
Type
UCPTpowerUpLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100% (for some ballasts 0% is not allowed)
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
100%
Description
Initial dim level of DALI lamp after power has been applied to lamp. Corresponds to the DALIRegister POWER ON LEVEL.
nciSysFailurLev
Type
UCPTsysFailureLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
255 means invalid value/keep current dim level
Default Value
invalid value (255)
Description
This configuration property determines the dim value of a DALI lamp in case of a DALI system
failure. Corresponds to the DALI-Register SYSTEM FAILURE LEVEL.
nciFadeRate
Type
UCPTfadeRate
Valid Range
2.8..360 steps/s
Default Value
45 steps/s
Description
This configuration property determines the fade rate of a lamp in percent per second in ramping
mode. Corresponds to the DALI-Register FADE RATE.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
161
LOYTEC
nciFadeTime
Type
UCPTfadeTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..10 sec
Default Value
0 sec
Description
This configuration property determines the duration of a fade time in fading mode. Corresponds to
the DALI-Register FADE TIME.
nciNominalPwr
Type
UCPTnominalPwr (SNVT_power)
Valid Range
0..6553.5 W
Resolution: 0.1 W
0 means AUTO
Default Value
AUTO
Description
This configuration property specifies the nominal power of the lamp. It is used to calculate the
energy consumption.
Some DALI ballasts can report their nominal power. In this case the configuration property should
be set to 0 (AUTO).
nciEmTestDelay
Type
UCPTtestDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property is used for the emergency light test which is started by the network
variable input nviEmergTest. It defines the time after which the dim level of the emergency lamps
is compared with the reference value nciEmTestValue.
nciEmTestValue
Type
UCPTtestValue (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property is used for the emergency light test which is started by the network
variable input nviEmergTest. It defines the reference value to which the dim level of the
emergency lamps will be compared.
nciBurnInTime
Type
UCPTburnInTime (SNVT_time_hour)
Valid Range
0..65,535 h
Default Value
100 h
Description
This configuration defines the burn-in time for new lamp. The burn-in mode is started via the
network variable input nviCommand.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
162
LOYTEC
nciDaliCfg
Type
UCPTdaliCfg
Valid Range
-
Default Value
-
Description
This configuration property contains the device type specific DALI-Registers. It is only available
if the device type of a device is known, either because it was assigned or because the device type
was set in the DALI Installation tab.
7.2.6 Light Sensor Object #1010
The L-DALI provides 16 light sensor objects for each DALI channel. A light sensor object
makes the measured lux level of a DALI light sensor available on the CEA-709 network.
Light Sensor #1010
nvoLuxLevel
SNVT_lux
nciLocation
nciFieldCalibr
nciGain
nciMinSendTime
nciMaxSendTime
nciMinDelta
Figure 140: Light Sensor Object
7.2.6.1
Sensor Calibration
To provide a reliable measurement the light sensor needs to be calibrated. The calibration is
best performed with the L-DALI configuration software (refer to Section 6.9.2) or using the
Web Interface (refer to Section 4.2.11.5).
7.2.6.2
Output Network Variables
nvoLuxLevel
Type
SNVT_lux
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
0
Description
This network variable provides the lux level measured by the light sensor.
If no corresponding light sensor is present on the DALI network the value is 0.
7.2.6.3
Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
163
LOYTEC
nciLocation
Type
SCPTLocation (SNVT_str_asc)
Valid Range
31 ASCII characters
Default Value
Sensor X
Description
This configuration property can be used to specify the name of the light sensor.
nciFieldCalibr
Type
UCPTfieldCalibArray
Valid Range
.index:
.value:
Default Value
-
Description
This configuration property is used to calibrate the light sensor. To counter any non-linearity the
sensor can be calibrated under up to seven different illumination levels (table with index 0-6).
0..6
0..65,535 lux
The .index field specifies the index into the gain table (nciGain) for different illumination levels.
The .value field is used to specify the lux value measured with an external luxmeter. It is used
together with the lux value reported by the sensor to compute the corresponding entry in the gain
table.
nciGain
Type
UCPTgainArray
Valid Range
.gain_mul[7]:
.gain_div[7]:
Default Value
1/1
Description
This configuration property is used to store the calibration data.
0..65,535 lux
0..65,535 lux
.gain_mul[i] contains the lux value measured by a luxmeter.
.gain_div[i] contains the lux value measured by the light sensor.
nciMinSendTime
Type
SCPTminSendTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
1.0 sec
Description
Minimum time between updates of the nvoLuxLevel output.
nciMaxSendTime
Type
SCPTmaxSendTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
60.0 sec
Description
Maximum time between updates of the nvoLuxLevel output (heartbeat functionality).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
164
LOYTEC
nciMinDelta
Type
SCPTminDeltaLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
2.5%
Description
This configuration property specifies the amount by which the lux level must change before
nvoLuxLevel is updated.
7.2.7 Occupancy Sensor Object #1060
The L-DALI provides 16 occupancy sensor objects for each DALI channel. The occupancy
sensor object makes the state of a DALI occupancy sensor available on the CEA-709
network.
Occupancy Sensor #1060
nvoOccup
SNVT_occupancy
nciHeartBeat
nciDebounce
nciUnoccupValue
nciOccupValue
nciUnoccupDly
Figure 141: Occupancy Sensor Object.
7.2.7.1
Timing Description
The timing diagram shown in Figure 142 defines the different timers used by the occupancy
sensor object.
Figure 142: Timing of occupancy detection.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.2.7.2
165
LOYTEC
Output Network Variables
nvoOccup
Type
SNVT_occupancy
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
OC_NUL
Description
This network variable provides the occupancy state measured by the occupancy sensor.
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Area is temporarily occupied for the bypass period
Area is temporarily unoccupied
If no corresponding occupancy sensor is present on the DALI network the value is OC_NUL.
7.2.7.3
Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
nciHeartBeat
Type
SCPTheartbeat (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
120.0 sec
Description
Maximum period of time that expires before the object automatically transmits the present value
of the nvoOccup output NV.
nciDebounce
Type
SCPTdebounce (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0 sec
Description
Debouncing time to generate the detection envelope for occupancy detection and the OCCUPIED
and NON OCCUPIED message.
nciUnoccupValue
Type
UCPTunoccupiedValue (SNVT_occupancy)
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
OC_UNOCCUPIED
Description
This configuration property defines what value is transmitted via nvoOccup when the sensor
detects that the room is unoccupied.
Version 2.0.1
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Area is temporarily occupied for the bypass period
Area is temporarily unoccupied
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
166
LOYTEC
nciOccupValue
Type
UCPToccupiedValue (SNVT_occupancy)
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
OC_ OCCUPIED
Description
This configuration property defines what value is transmitted via nvoOccup when the sensor
detects that the room is occupied.
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Area is temporarily occupied for the bypass period
Area is temporarily unoccupied
nciUnoccupDly
Type
UCPTunoccupDly (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
0s means disabled (no delay)
Default Value
0 sec
Description
This configuration property specifies the delay after which nvoOccup adopts the unoccupied
value. The timer is started when the occupancy sensor detects that the room is unoccupied
7.2.8 Constant Light Controller Object #3050
The L-DALI provides 16 constant light controller objects with built in occupancy controller
functionality for each DALI channel.
Constant Light Controller
#3050
nviLuxLevel
SNVT_lux
nvoLampValue
SNVT_switch
nviCLSetting
SNVT_setting
nvoLamp2Value
SNVT_switch
nviOccup
SNVT_occupency
nvoCLAutoMode
SNVT_switch
nviOverride
SNVT_switch
nciCLMode
nciLuxSetpoint
nciLocation
nciLuxUpperLimit
nciLamp2Offset
nciLamp2Limit
nciStep
nciOnHysteresis
nciOffHysteresis
nciCLOnDelay
nciCLOffDelay
nciHoldTime
nciPrimeVal
nciUnoccupiedLevel
nciIgnoreTime
nciMinSendTime
nciMaxSendTime
nciMaxRcvTime
nciArtificialLight
nciGain
nciSblndHyst
nciDimCurve
Figure 143: Constant Light Controller Object
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.2.8.1
167
LOYTEC
Interaction with other LONMARK Objects
To minimize the number of bindings that have to be created the constant light controller
uses default connections to the local light sensor, occupancy sensor, and group objects in
case no “real” bindings are done. Figure 144 shows these default connections of the
constant light controller object. Per default the constant light controller with index X
controls the group object with index X. The current lux level is received from the light
sensor object with index X and the occupancy state is received from the occupancy sensor
X. The default connections can be changed by creating bindings with the network
management tool. A detailed description under which conditions the default connections
apply is given in Table 12.
Light Sensor X
Constant Light Controller X
nvoLuxLevel
SNVT_lux
nviLuxLevel
SNVT_lux
Group Object X
nvoLampValue
SNVT_switch
nviGPValue
SNVT_switch
Occupancy Sensor X
nvoOccup
SNVT_occupied
nviOccup
SNVT_occupied
Figure 144: Default Connections to other LONMARK Objects
Default Connection
Condition
Lux Level
The default connection applies if the following network variables
are not bound:
Occupancy State
The default connection applies if the following network variables
are not bound:


Lamp Value
nviLuxLevel (Constant Light Controller X)
nviOccup (Constant Light Controller X)
The default connection applies if the following network variables
are not bound:

nvoLampValue (Constant Light Controller X)

nviGPValue (Group Object X)

nviGPSetting (Group Object X)

nviGPOverride (Group Object X)

nviGPScene (Group Object X)
Table 12: Default Connections
7.2.8.2
Setpoint
The desired setpoint for the illumination level is configured via the configuration property
nciLuxSetpoint. The input network variable nviCLSetting of type SNVT_setting switches
the constant light controller on or off. Furthermore this network variable can be used to
temporarily adjust the setpoint.
7.2.8.3
Operating Modes
The operating mode of the constant light controller is set via the configuration property
nciCLMode. Table 13 shows the different operating modes and under which conditions they
are used:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
168
LOYTEC
Operating Mode
Description
UPDATER
A DALI sensor with constant light controller functionality shall
be mapped to the CEA-709 network. Only the setpoint shall be
adjustable via the CEA-709 interface.
CONTROL
A light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
An occupancy sensor is installed.
REGULATOR
A light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is installed.
An occupancy sensor is installed.
CONTROL_NO_OCC
A light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
REGULATOR_NO_OCC
A light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
PRESENCE
Based on occupancy the lights shall be switched on and off.
MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF
Lights are switched on manually, but shall be switched off
based on occupancy.
Table 13: Constant Light Controller Operation Modes
Updater Mode
The UPDATER mode has to be selected when a DALI light/occupancy sensor with constant
light controller functionality is installed on the DALI network. In this mode no light level
computation is performed. The controller simply forwards the parameters to the DALI
constant light controller and retrieves lamp setting from the DALI light sensor.
In general, LOYTEC does not recommend using UPDATER mode. Wherever possible use
REGULATOR or CONTROL mode instead and use DALI sensors only as lux level and
occupancy information source via the corresponding sensor objects. These modes allow
improved influence of the constant light controller’s parameters via the fieldbus side.
Control Mode
The CONTROL mode has to be selected if the installed light sensor measures the outdoor
illumination. The constant light controller receives the current outdoor lux level via the
input network variable nviLuxLevel and sets the lamp level (from 0% to 100%) accordingly
(see Figure 145).
Figure 145: Control Mode
The configuration property nciStep ensures that the light level does not change abruptly. Per
second the light level is not changed more than the percentage value defined by this
configuration property. When the light is switched on or off, nciStep is not taken into
account.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
169
LOYTEC
To ensure that the setpoint is reached under all weather conditions, the control curve shown
Figure 145 has to be adjusted by calibrating the constant light controller. The calibration of
the constant light controller is best performed with the L-DALI configuration software (refer
to Section 6.9.3).
The control mode is available in two flavors: with or without occupancy sensor. If an
occupancy sensor is installed and the room becomes unoccupied, the current light level is
saved and the light is dimmed to 0. If the room becomes occupied before the light has
reached 0, the saved light level is restored.
Regulator Mode
The REGULATOR mode has to be selected if the installed light sensor measures the indoor
brightness. The constant light controller receives the current indoor lux level via the input
network variable nviLuxLevel and adjusts the lamp level (from 0% to 100%) by means of a
fuzzy control algorithm.
When the light is switched on the control algorithm selects a lamp value which results in a
lux level close to the desired setpoint and then adjusts the lamp value in increments once
every second until the configured setpoint is reached. The size of increments is adjusted
dynamically but will never exceed the percentage value defined in the configuration
property nciStep.
To ensure that the setpoint is reached under all light conditions the parameters of the control
algorithm have to be adjusted by calibrating the constant light controller. The calibration of
the constant light controller is best performed with the L-DALI configuration software (refer
to Section 6.9.3).
The regulator mode is available in two flavors: with our without occupancy sensor. If an
occupancy sensor is installed and the room becomes unoccupied, the current light level is
saved and the light is dimmed to 0. If the room becomes occupied before the light has
reached 0, the saved light level is restored.
Presence Mode
The PRESENCE mode has to be if the constant light controller shall operate as occupancy
controller. In this mode the light is switched to the value nciPrimeVal if the room is
occupied and to the value nciUnoccupiedLevel if the room is unoccupied. If nciCLOffDelay
is not zero, lights will be switched off after remaining this time at nciUnoccupiedLevel.
If the network variable input nviLuxLevel is bound, the light is switched to the value
nciPrimeVal only if the lux level is below nciLuxSetpoint and the room is occupied.
Manual-On/Auto-Off Mode
The MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF mode is a variation of the PRESENCE mode. However,
in this mode the constant light controller does not switch on the lights, when the room
becomes occupied. Rather, it switches the lights off when the room becomes unoccupied,
using nciHoldTime, nciUnoccupiedLevel, and nciCLOffDelay similar to PRESENCE mode.
7.2.8.4
Prioritized Control
The network variable input nviCLOverride can be used to override the constant light
controller algorithm. Valid (.state=0/1) values received on this inputs are directly passed to
the nvoLampValue output.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.2.8.5
170
LOYTEC
Controlling Multiple Light Bands
The L-DALI constant light controller allows controlling two light bands (groups). The
primary light band is near the inside of the building, the secondary light band is near the
window front. Depending on the outdoor light intensity the primary light band has to be
brighter than the secondary light band to illuminate the room evenly.
The primary light band is controlled by the output network variable nvoLampValue, the
secondary light band by the output network variable nvoLamp2Value. The maximum
difference between the two light bands can be configured via the configuration property
nciLamp2Offset as shown in Figure 146. The configuration property nciLamp2Limit defines
the light level above which the values of nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value are identical.
Figure 146: Secondary Light Band
7.2.8.6
Occupancy Detection
The constant light controller receives the occupancy information via the network variable
input nviOccup. The constant light controller changes to the occupied state when the value
OC_OCCUPIED is received. When the OC_UNOCCUPIED value is received the constant
light controller remains in the occupied state until the hold time configured in nciHoldTime
has expired and then changes to the unoccupied state. Further, if no OC_OCCUPIED is
received for the time configured in nciHoldTime the constant light controller changes to the
unoccupied state, too.
This behavior typically required the occupancy sensor to send OC_OCCUPIED with a
regular interval (heartbeat). It allows using multiple occupancy sensors with the same
constant light controller (fan-in).
After the light has been switched off any updates on the nviOccup input are ignored for the
time specified in nciIgnoreTime.
7.2.8.7
Interacting with Sunblind Controller
One or more local sunblind controller objects can be linked to a constant light controller
object. Typically sunblind controllers are linked to the constant light controller of the same
room. If they change the sunblind’s position or rotation the sunblind controllers inform the
linked constant light controller. The constant light controller uses this information to
“ignore” temporary changes of the rooms illumination levels due to the moving sunblinds
and, thus, can avoid to switch on lights unnecessarily.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.2.8.8
171
LOYTEC
Museum Mode
The museum mode is activated by setting an upper limit for the lux level in the room using
the configuration property nciLuxUpperLimit. In museum mode the constant light controller
cooperates with the linked sunblind controllers to ensure that the measured lux level stays
between nciLuxSetpoint and nciLuxUpperLimit. Therefore at least one sunblind controller
has to be linked to the constant light controller.
If the light intensity in the room needs to be increased to reach the lower setpoint
(nciLuxSetpoint) there are two possibilities: Increase the lamp level or open the sunblinds.
The configuration property nciSblndHyst defines how much the lamp level is increased or
decreased before opening or closing the sunblinds respectively.
7.2.8.9
Timing Parameters
To avoid that the constant light controller switches the light on and off repeatedly if the
measured lux value is near the setpoint, a hysteresis can be configured. The configuration
parameter nciOffHysteresis defines the hysteresis for switching off the lamp and the
configuration property nciOnHysteresis defines the hysteresis for switching on the lamp. In
addition a delay can be configured before the lamp is switched on (nciClOnDelay) or off
(nciClOffDelay). Figure 147 illustrates these configuration parameters.
Figure 147: Constant Light Controller Timing
7.2.8.10 Set-Up Checklist
To get a working constant light controller object at least the following configuration steps
have to be performed:
1.
Version 2.0.1
Bindings: If the constant light controller is not operated with its default auto-bindings
(see Section 7.2.8.1) at least the following NVs have to be bound:

nviOccup

nviLuxLevel

nvoLampValue
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
172
LOYTEC
2.
Mode: The operating mode of the constant light controller has to be configured using
nciCLMode (see Section 7.2.8.3).
3.
Enable CLC: The constant light controller has to be enabled by writing the value
SET_ON to “function” field of the NV nviCLSetting.
4.
Disable override: Ensure no override is active via the NV nviCLOverride (see Section
7.2.8.4).
7.2.8.11 Input Network Variables
nviLuxLevel
Type
SNVT_lux
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input provides the illumination level measured by the light sensor.
If the variable is not bound, the nvoLuxLevel output of the light sensor object with the same
instance number as the constant light controller is used.
nviCLSetting
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_OFF (0):
Disable and switch off.
SET_ON (1)
Enable.
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setpoint by specified value.
SET_UP (3)
Increase setpoint by specified value.
SET_STATE (5) Override to specified value.
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: not used
Default Value
Description
Version 2.0.1
This network variable input is used to enable (SET_ON) or disable (SET_OFF) the controller, to
adjust the set point of the constant light controller (SET_UP and SET_DOWN) or to manually
update the nvoLampValue and the nvoLamp2Value (SET_STATE).
Function
Description
SET_OFF
Deactivates the constant light controller and switches off the lamp
value outputs nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value.
SET_ON
Activates the constant light controller.
SET_UP,
SET_DOWN
The set point of the controller can be increased (SET_UP) or
decreased (SET_DOWN) temporarily. The .setting value is used to
define the relative size of the increment/decrement. The changes
made to the set point are not stored permanently into the memory.
The next SET_ON command restored the original set point value
(nciLuxSetpoint).
SET_STATE
Deactivates the constant light controller and sets nvoLampValue and
nvoLamp2Value to the value specified in the .setting field.
nciLamp2Offset and nciLamp2Limit are not considered.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
173
LOYTEC
nviOccup
Type
SNVT_occupancy
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
OC_NUL
Description
This network variable input provides the occupancy state measured by the occupancy sensor.
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Ignored
Ignored
If the variable is not bound, the nvoOccup output of the occupancy sensor object with the same
instance number as the constant light controller is used.
nviCLOverride
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1, -1
On:
Off:
Invalid:
.state=1 and .value>0
.state=0 and .value=0
.state=-1
Default Value
Description
This network variable input can be used to manually override the constant light controller.
If a valid value is received (.state = 0/1), the constant light controller is disabled and
nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value are set to the specified value. nciLamp2Offset and
nciLamp2Limit are not considered.
If an invalid value (state –1) is received, the constant light controller returned to normal operation
7.2.8.12 Output Network Variables
nvoLampValue
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1, -1
On:
Off:
Invalid:
.state=1 and .value>0
.state=0 and .value=0
.state=-1
Default Value
Description
This network variable outputs provides the state (ON or OFF), and the percentage level of
intensity for a lamp actuator.
If the variable is not bound, the value is transmitted to the nviGPValue input of the DALI group
object with the same instance number as the constant light controller.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
174
LOYTEC
nvoLamp2Value
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1, -1
On:
Off:
Invalid:
.state=1 and .value>0
.state=0 and .value=0
.state=-1
Default Value
Description
This network variable provides the state (ON or OFF), and the percentage level of intensity for the
secondary light band. The value for the secondary light band (nvoLamp2Value) is set according to
the configuration properties nciLamp2Offset and nciLamp2Limit.
nvoCLAutoMode
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
On:
Off:
.state=1 and .value=100
.state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable output provides the current state of the constant light controller.
Off: The constant light controller is disabled or overridden by nviCLOverride.
On: The constant light controller is enabled and not overridden by nviCLOverride.
7.2.8.13 Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
NciLocation
Type
SCPTLocation (SNVT_str_asc)
Valid Range
31 ASCII characters
Default Value
Light Controller X
Description
This configuration property can be used to specify the name of the constant light controller
nciLuxSetpoint
Type
SCPTluxSetpoint (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
500 lux
Description
Defines the illumination level setpoint.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
175
LOYTEC
nciCLMode
Type
UCPTclMode (byte)
Valid Range
CL_MODE_DISABLED
CL_MODE_REGULATOR
CL_MODE_CONTROL
CL_MODE_UPDATER
CL_MODE_PRESENCE
CL_MODE_REGULATOR_NO_OCC
CL_MODE_CONTROL_NO_OCC
CL_MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF
Default Value
CL_MODE_DISABLED
Description
This configuration property defines the operating mode of the constant light controller.
Mode
Description
UPDATER
A DALI sensor with constant light controller functionality is
installed on the DALI network.
CONTROL
A Light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
An Occupancy sensor is installed.
REGULATOR
A Light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is
installed.
An Occupancy sensor is installed.
CONTROL_NO_OCC
A Light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
REGULATOR_NO_OCC
Light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is
installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
PRESENCE
An Occupancy sensor is installed.
No light sensor is installed.
MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF
Similar to PRESENCE. Lights are switched on manually,
but shall be switched off based on occupancy.
nciLamp2Offset
Type
UCPTlampOffset (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
30%
Description
This configuration property defines the maximum offset between the output for the primary light
band (nvoLampValue) and the secondary light band (nvoLamp2Value).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
176
LOYTEC
nciLamp2Limit
Type
UCPTlampLimit (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
70%
Description
This configuration property specifies the dim level at which the output for the secondary light
band (nvoLamp2Value) becomes identical to the primary output (nvoLampValue).
nciStep
Type
SCPTstep (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
3%
Description
This configuration property defines the maximum step size that the constant light controller will
take to approach the target illumination. Per second the light level is not changed more than the
percentage value defined by this configuration property.
nciOnHysteresis
Type
UCPTonHysteresis (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
5%
Description
This configuration property defines the hysteresis for switching ON the lamp.
The hysteresis is used in CONTROL or REGULATOR mode.
nciOffHysteresis
Type
UCPToffHysteresis (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
5%
Description
This configuration property sets the hysteresis for switching OFF the lamp.
The hysteresis is used in CONTROL or REGULATOR mode.
nciMinSendTime
Type
SCPTminSendTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.5 sec
Description
Minimum time between updates of the nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value outputs.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
177
LOYTEC
nciMaxSendTime
Type
SCPTmaxSendTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
300.0 sec
Description
Maximum time between updates of the nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value outputs (heartbeat
functionality).
nciMaxRcvTime
Type
SCPTmaxRcvTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (disabled)
Description
This configuration property specifies the expected update interval of the nviLuxLevel network
variable input. If the time elapses without an update of the variable an alarm is generated.
If no update is received on nviLuxLevel for 10 intervals the nvoLampValue and nvoLamp2Value
network variable outputs are set to 50%.
nciCLOffDelay
Type
UCPTclOffDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
300.0 sec
Description
This configuration property specifies the delay after which the lamp value output (nvoLampValue/
nvoLamp2Value) is switched off.
nciCLOnDelay
Type
UCPTclOnDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Description
This configuration property specifies the delay after which the lamp value output (nvoLampValue/
nvoLamp2Value) is switched on.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
178
LOYTEC
nciArtificialLight
Type
UCPTartificialLight (SNVT_muldiv)
Valid Range
.multipier: 0..65,335 lux
.divisor: 0..65,335 lux
Default Value
-
Description
This configuration property is used if the light sensor has a different sensibility for artificial light
then for natural light.
To configure the artificial light factor do the following:

Darken the room and set the lamp to the maximum value. Measure the lux value on the
reference area with a luxmeter and with the light sensor. Then switch off the lamps and
measure the lux value again with a luxmeter and the light sensor.

Enter the difference of the lux measured by the luxmeter in .multiplier and the lux value
difference measured by the light sensor in .divisor.
nciGain
Type
SCPTgain (SNVT_muldiv)
Valid Range
.multipier: 0..65,335 lux
.divisor: 0..65,335 lux
Default Value
1/1
Description
This configuration property is used to calibrate the light sensor. The configuration property is only
needed if the light sensor does not have its own way of calibration. To calibrate the light sensor
enter the lux value measured by a luxmeter in .multiplier and the lux value of the light sensor in
.divisor. The lux level should be near the setpoint for best results.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
179
LOYTEC
nciDimCurve
Type
UCPTdimmingCurve
Valid Range
.used:
.level_0:
.level_1:
.level_2:
.level_3:
.level_4:
.level_5:
.level_6:
.level_7:
.level_8:
.level_9:
.level_10:
Default Value
.used = 0
.level_0 = 1%
.level_1 = 1.5%
.level_2 = 2.5%
.level_3 = 4%
.level_4 = 6.5%
.level_5 = 10%
.level_6 = 16%
.level_7 = 25%
.level_8 = 40%
.level_9 = 64%
.level_10 = 100%
Description
This configuration property permits to adjust the characteristic of the lamp for the human vision.
0, 1
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
0..100%, Resolution: 0.5
If DALI lights are used the default values can be kept.
nciHoldTime
Type
SCPTholdTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
600.0 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the hold time for the occupied state. When the
OC_OCCUPIED value is received via nviOccup the constant light controller remains in the
occupied state until the hold time has expired and then changes to the unoccupied state.
nciPrimeVal
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1, -1
On:
Off:
.state=1 and .value>0
.state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
Version 2.0.1
100%
If the constant light controller operates in PRESENCE mode, this configuration property defines
the value adopted by nvoLampValue when the room is occupied.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
180
LOYTEC
nciUnoccupiedLevel
Type
UCPTunoccupiedLevel (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
0.0%
Description
If the constant light controller operates in PRESENCE or MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF mode, this
configuration property defines the value adopted by nvoLampValue when the room is unoccupied.
nciIgnoreTime
Type
UCPTignoreTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the time during which updates on nviOccup are ignored after
that lamp was switched off.
nciLuxUpperLimit
Type
UCPTluxUpperLimit (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
0 lux
Description
The museum mode is activated by setting this configuration property to a value greater than 0. In
museum mode the constant light controller cooperates with the sunblind controller to ensure that
the measured lux level stays between nciLuxSetpoint and nciLuxUpperLimit. Therefore a sunblind
controller has to be linked to the constant light controller by writing the constant light controller
index to the configuration property nciClNumber of the sunblind controller.
nciSblndHyst
Type
UCPTsunblindHysteresis (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
20%
Description
This configuration property applies only for museum mode. It defines by which percentage the
lamp dim value is increased before letting more sunlight in by opening the sunblinds.
7.2.9 Sunblind Controller Object #6111
The L-DALI provides 16 sunblind controller objects for each DALI channel.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
181
Sunblind Controller #6111
LOYTEC
nviOverride
SNVT_switch
nviLocalControl
SNVT_setting
nvoSblndSetting
SNVT_setting
nviSetOverride
SNVT_setting
nviGroupControl
SNVT_setting
nvoSblndState
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviMaintenance
SNVT_switch
nviGlobalControl
SNVT_setting
nvoSBMode
SNVT_state
nviSetMaint
SNVT_setting
nviSBSettingFB
SNVT_setting
nvoSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviOccSensor
SNVT_occupancy
nviSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviOccManCmd
SNVT_occupancy
nviIndoorTemp
SNVT_temp_p
nviGlare
SNVT_switch
nviTerminalLoad
SNVT_lev_percent
nviIllumLev
SNVT_lux
nviScene
SNVT_scene
nviWindowContact
SNVT_switch
nciMaxSendTime
nciWinConFailPos
nciOverrideValue
nciDriveDelay
nciSLLowLim
nciMaxAzimuth
nciBladeDist
nciMaxRotation
nciHoldTime
nciDeltaLevel
nciCLNumber
nciMaxRcvTime
nciBypassTime
nciMaintValue
nciSLHighLim
nciMinAzimuth
nciBladeWidth
nciRotOffset
nciMinRotation
nciDeltaTemp
nciSblndEvtPrio
Figure 148: Sunblind Controller Object
7.2.9.1
Glare Protection
The sunblind controller can automatically control the connected sunblind actuator to
provide glare protection. To do so the sunblind controller needs to know the geometry of the
sunblind blades.
Figure 149: Sunblind Geometry
The blade distance (D) has to be configured in the configuration property nciBladeDist and
the blade width in nciBladeWidth. The minimum and maximum rotation angle (α) is
configured in nciMinRot and nciMaxRot. Based on this geometry data and the current sun
elevation (nviSunElevation) the glare protection algorithm calculates the rotation angle for
the blades. The rotation angle can be optimized for a specific sunblind type by specifying an
offset in the configuration property nciRotOffset.
The following parameters determine if glare protection is necessary:
-
Version 2.0.1
Sun Azimuth (nviSunAzimuth): Depending on the orientation of the
window, the sun can only shine into the room from a certain azimuth in
the morning (nciMinAzimuth) to a certain azimuth in the evening
(nciMaxAzimuzh).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
182
LOYTEC
-
Outdoor lux level (nviSunLux): The glare protection will be activated if
the measured outdoor lux level is above nciSlHiLimGlare. If the outdoor
lux level falls below nciSlLoLimGlare the glare protection will be
deactivated. These two configuration properties implement a hysteresis.
-
Surrounding buildings/objects: The network variable inputs
nviGlobalGlare and nviGlobalShadow can be used to provide geometry
information on surrounding buildings/objects. Glare protection is active
when the corresponding bit in nviGlobalGlare is active and the one in
nviGlobalShadow is inactive.
Alternatively the need for glare protection can be computed by a separate device. In this
case the network variable input nviGlare can be used to override the automatic glare
detection algorithm.
7.2.9.2
View Protection
To protect rooms against prying eyes the sunblind can be closed automatically when the
indoor light is switched on and the outdoor light level (nviSunLux) falls below the indoor
light level (nviIllumLev). To avoid that the sunblind opens and closes repeatedly a hysteresis
can be configured using the configuration property nciViewProtHyst.
7.2.9.3
Heating/Cooling
If the room is not occupied, the L-DALI can close the sunblind to provide thermal isolation
in order to save energy.
The network variable input nviTerminalLoad is used to inform the controller of the current
heating/cooling demand of the system. Positive values indicate that cooling energy is
required, while negative values indicate that heating energy is required.
If nviTerminalLoad is not bound, but nviOutdoorTemp is bound, heating demand is
assumed if the moving average outdoor temperature falls below 12°C/54°F, cooling demand
is assumed if it is above 19°C/66°F.
The algorithm takes the following parameters into account:
7.2.9.4
-
Outdoor lux level (nviSunLux): The energy of the sun can be used to
warm a room. The configuration property nciSlHiLimTem defines the lux
level above which the sun energy will make a noticeable contribution to
warm the room if the sunblind is open. The configuration property
nciSlLoLimTem define the lux level below which the sun energy is too
low to warm the room. To avoid that the sunblind opens and closes
repeatedly a hysteresis can be specified using the configuration property
nciTermSLHyst.
-
Temperature: The outdoor temperature (nviOutdoorTemp) is compared
with the indoor temperature (nviIndoorTemp). Depending on whether the
system is in heating or in cooling mode and on the temperature difference
the sunblinds are closed to increase thermal isolation of the room. To
avoid that the sunblind opens and closes repeatedly a hysteresis can be
specified using the configuration property nciTermTempHyst.
Manual Control
To control the sunblind manually the L-DALI sunblind controller offers the possibilities to
directly select a setpoint and to select a scene.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
183
LOYTEC
Direct Control
The sunblind can be controlled manually by the following network variable inputs of type
SNVT_setting:

nviLocalControl: Using this input network variable a local control devices can
provide the setpoint for the sunblind.

nviGroupControl: Using this input network variable a control device which
controls a group of sunblinds can provide the setpoint for the sunblind.

nviGlobalControl: Using this input network variable a control device which
controls all sunblinds can provide the setpoint for the sunblind.
Per default nviLocalControl takes precedence over nviGroupControl which in turn takes
precedence over nviGlobalControl. The priorities can be changes as described in Section
7.2.9.9. Local, group, and global control commands can be cancelled by setting the
.function field of the corresponding network variable to SET_NUL.
Scenes
Using the input network variable nviSBScene of type SNVT_scene up to 16 sunblind scenes
can be saved and recalled. The command SC_LEARN stores the current sunblind position
and rotation in the specified scene number. By a SC_RECALL command previously stored
scenes can be recalled. Scenes can be deleted by a SC_RESET command.
7.2.9.5
Prioritized Control
The L-DALI sunblind controller offers two methods for prioritized control: maintenance
mode and override mode. Maintenance mode has the highest priority and cannot be
changed. The priority of override mode can be changed as described in Section 7.2.9.9.
Maintenance Mode
There are two alternative ways to control the sunblind in maintenance mode:

nviSetMaint: This input network variable of type SNVT_setting overrides the
sunblind output. The maintenance mode override is canceled by setting the
.function field to SET_NULL.

nviMaintenance, nciMaintValue: The nviMaintenance network variable of type
SNVT_switch can be used to switch on/off maintenance mode. If the maintenance
mode is active, the sunblind output is set to the value of the configuration property
nciMaintValue (type SNVT_setting).
Override Mode
There are two alternative ways to control the sunblind in override mode:
Version 2.0.1

nviSetOverride: This input network variable of type SNVT_setting overrides the
sunblind output. The override is canceled by setting the .function field to
SET_NULL.

nviSBOverride, nciOverrideValue: The nviSBOverride network variable of type
SNVT_switch can be used to switch on/off override mode. If the override mode is
active, the sunblind output is set to the value of the configuration property
nciOverrideValue (type SNVT_setting).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.2.9.6
184
LOYTEC
Museum Mode
For the museum mode of the constant light controller (see Section 7.2.8.8) a sunblind
controller must be linked to the constant light controller.
7.2.9.7
Output and Feedback
The L-DALI sunblind controller supports actuators with a control input of type
SNVT_sblnd_state (see Figure 150) as well as sunblind actuators with a control input of
type SNVT_setting (see Figure 151).
The configuration property nciDriveDelay defines the delay which the sunblind controller
waits until it updates its outputs. If different drive delays are configured for the different
sunblind controllers, the sunblinds will not drive at the same time avoiding a power peak.
Sunblind Controller
nvoSblndSetting
SNVT_setting
nvoSblndState
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviSblndState
SNVT_sblnd_state
nvoSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
SCADA
nviSBSettingFB
SNVT_setting
nviSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
Sunblind Actuator
nvoSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
Figure 150: Controlling a Sunblind Actuator via SNVT_sblnd_state
Sunblind Controller
Sunblind Actuator
nvoSblndSetting
SNVT_setting
nviSblndSetting
SNVT_setting
nvoSBSettingFB
SNVT_setting
nvoSblndState
SNVT_sblnd_state
SCADA
nviSBSettingFB
SNVT_setting
nviSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
nvoSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
nviSBStateFB
SNVT_sblnd_state
Figure 151: Controlling a Sunblind Actuator via SNVT_setting
The output network variable nvoSBStateFB can be used by e.g. a SCADA system to display
the current state of the sunblind. It includes status information from the sunblind controller,
which is merged with feedback information from the sunblind actuator, if available.
The event state (e.g. maintenance mode, rain condition, wind, etc) of the sunblind controller
is reported in the output network variable nvoSBMode.
7.2.9.8
Occupancy Detection
The occupied/unoccupied status of the room can be determined by an occupancy sensor
and/or a manual command.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
185
LOYTEC
Occupancy Sensor
To connect an occupancy sensor the network variable input nviOccSensor is used. The
sunblind controller changes to the occupied state when the value OC_OCCUPIED is
received. When the OC_UNOCCUPIED value is received the sunblind controller remains in
the occupied state until the hold time configured in nciHoldTime has expired and then
changes to the unoccupied state. Further, if no OC_OCCUPIED is received for the time
configured in nciHoldTime the sunblind controller changes to the unoccupied state, too.
Manual Command
The network variable input nviOccManCmd is used to override the occupancy sensor or if
no occupancy sensor is available. This network variable of type SNVT_occupancy can have
the following values:
7.2.9.9

OC_OCCUPIED: The sunblind controller should operate in the occupied mode.

OC_UNOCCUPIED: The sunblind controller should operate in the unoccupied
mode.

OC_BYPASS: The sunblind controller should operate in the occupied mode for a
period of time defined by the configuration property nciBypassTime.
Sunblind Controller Events and Priority
The operation of the sunblind controller is influenced by a number of events. Table 14
describes the different events and shows their default priority. The priority of events can be
changed. Events can be deactivated by setting the priority to -1. Usually this is done with
the L-DALI Configurator as described in Section 6.9.4.
Priority
Event
Description
18 (highest)
Set maintenance request
The network variable input nviSetMaint is active (.function not
SET_NUL). See Section 7.2.9.5 for detail.
17
Maintenance request
The network variable input nviMaintenance is switched on. The sunblind
moves to the position specified in nciMaintValue. See Section 7.2.9.5 for
detail.
16
Weather sensor alarm*
At least one of the weather sensors failed:

No update has been received on nviWind for longer than
nciWindRcvT.

No update has been received on nviRain for longer than
nciRainRcvT.

No update has been received on nviFrost for longer than
nciFrostRcvT.
The alarm condition for the wind, rain, and frost sensor is active only if
the corresponding network variable input is bound.
In case of a weather sensor alarm the sunblind drives to the position
defined by nciWinConFailPos.
15
Window sensor alarm*
Window sensor failed: No update has been received on
nviWindowContact for longer than nciMaxRcvTime. This alarm is only
active if the nviWindowContact network variable is bound.
In case of a window sensor alarm the sunblind drives to the position
defined by nciWinConFailPos.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
186
LOYTEC
Priority
Event
Description
14
Frost condition*
The sunblind controller enters the frost state if the network variable input
nviFrost is active. When nviFrost becomes inactive the sunblind
controller remains in the frost state for the hold time configured in
nciRainFroOffDly.
The sunblind does not move as long as the sunblind controller is in the
frost state.
13
Wind*
The sunblind controller enters the wind alarm state if the measured wind
speed (nviWind) exceeds the threshold configured in nciWindLimit.
When the wind speed falls below the threshold the sunblind controller
remains in the wind alarm state for the hold time configured in
nciWindOffDly.
The sunblind remains open while the sunblind controller is in the wind
alarm state.
12
Rain condition*
The sunblind controller enters the rain state if the network variable input
nviRain is active. When nviRain becomes inactive the sunblind controller
remains in the rain state for the hold time configured in
nciRainFroOffDly.
The sunblind remains open while the sunblind controller is in the rain
state.
11
Set override request
The network variable input nviSetOverride is active (.function
!=SET_NUL). See Section 7.2.9.5 for detail.
10
Override request
The network variable input nviSBOverride is switched on. The sunblind
drives to the position specified in nciOverrideValue. See Section 7.2.9.5
for detail.
9
Window open*
The window is open: The network variable input nviWindowContact is
active. The polarity of the window contact can be changed via the
configuration property nciInvWinCon.
The sunblind does not move as long as the window is open.
8
Local control
The network variable input nviLocalControl is active. See Section
7.2.9.4 for detail.
7
Group control
The network variable input nviGroupControl is active. See Section
7.2.9.4 for detail.
6
Global control
The network variable input nviGlobalControl is active. See Section
7.2.9.4 for detail.
5
Scene selection
Sunblind scene recalled via network variable input nviScene. See Section
7.2.9.4 for detail.
4
Anti-glare*
The sunblind is controlled by the anti-glare algorithm. Only active if
room is occupied. See Section 7.2.9.1 for detail.
3
View protection*
The sunblind is controlled by the view protection algorithm. Only active
if room is occupied. See Section 7.2.9.2 for detail.
2
Constant light request*
The sunblind is linked to the constant light controller and is controlled
by the museum mode algorithm. Only active if room is occupied. See
Section 7.2.8.8 for detail.
1
Up if occupied*
The room is occupied. See Section 7.2.9.8 for detail.
If the room is occupied the sunblind moves up.
0 (lowest)
Heat/cool request*
The sunblind is controlled by the heating/cooling algorithm. Only active
if room is not occupied. See Section 7.2.9.3 for detail.
Table 14: Sunblind Controller Events and Priority
For events marked with *) a minimum time can be configured via the configuration
property nciAutoEvMinTm. These events will stay active for at least the configured time
even if the event condition disappears before this time expires. In this way the sunblind
controller ensures that the sunblind does not drive too frequently.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
187
LOYTEC
In case none of the events is active the sunblind remains in its current position.
7.2.9.10 Input Network Variables
nviLocalControl
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid value.
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value.
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value.
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action.
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value.
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input is used to manually control the sunblind. Usually a local control
device gives this command.
A local control command can be canceled by setting .function to SET_NUL.
nviGroupControl
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input is used to manually control the sunblind. Usually a device which is
intended to control groups of controllers or actuators gives this command
A group control command can be canceled by setting .function to SET_NUL.
nviGlobalControl
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input is used to manually control the sunblind. Usually a device which is
intended to control all controllers or actuators gives this command
A global control command can be canceled by setting .function to SET_NUL.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
188
LOYTEC
nviSBSettingFB
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid value.
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value.
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value.
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action.
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value.
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
Feedback from sunblind actuator of type SNVT_setting.
nviSBStateFB
Type
SNVT_sblnd_state
Valid Range
.pos.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid value.
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value.
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value.
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action.
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value.
.pos.setting:
0..100, resolution 0.5
.pos.rotation:
-359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
.cmd_source:
SBCS_NUL, SBCS_LOCAL, SBCS_GROUP, …
.error_code:
SBE_NUL, SBE_NO_ERROR, SBE_IN_PROGRESS, …
Default Value
-
Description
Feedback from sunblind actuator of type SNVT_sblnd_state.
nviIndoorTemp
Type
SNVT_temp_p
Valid Range
-273.17°C...327.66°C
Resolution: 0.01°C
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input provides the room temperature measured by a temperature sensor.
This input is used if the sunblinds are used for heating/cooling (see Section 7.2.9.3).
nviTerminalLoad
Type
SNVT_lev_percent
Valid Range
-163.840..163.830
Resolution: 0.005
Default Value
Description
This network variable input is used if the sunblinds are used for heating/cooling (see Section
7.2.9.3). The input informs the controller of the current heating/cooling demand. Positive values
indicate that cooling energy is required, while negative values indicate that heating energy is
required.
If the network variable in not bound, the heating/cooling feature is disabled.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
189
LOYTEC
nviIllumLev
Type
SNVT_lux
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input provides the illumination level in the room. The input is used for
view protection (see Section 7.2.9.2). If nviIllumLev is higher than the nviSunLux then the
sunblind is closed to protect the room against prying eyes.
nviScene
Type
SNVT_scene
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
.function:
.scene_number:
Description
Using this input network variable up to 16 sunblind scenes can be saved and recalled.
SC_LEARN, SC_RECALL, SC_NUL
1..16
Function
Description
SC_LEARN
Stores the current sunblind position and rotation in the specified
scene number.
SC_RECALL
Recall a previously stored scene.
SC_RESET
Delete a scene.
nviWindowContact
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
Open:
Closed:
.state=1 and .value=100
.state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable input informs the controller if the window is open or close.
If the window is open, the sunblind stops moving.
nviOverride
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
On:
Off:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
.state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable input is used to switch on/off override mode.
If override mode is activated (.state=1 and .value between 0.5% and 100%), the sunblind adopts
the setting specified by nciOverrideValue.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
190
LOYTEC
nviSetOverride
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This input network variable overrides the sunblind output. The override is canceled by setting the
.function field to SET_NULL.
nviMaintenance
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
On:
Off:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
.state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable input is used to switch on/off maintenance mode.
If maintenance mode is activated (.state=1 and .value between 0.5% and 100%), the sunblind
adopts the setting specified by nciMaitnValue.
nviSetMaint
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This input network variable overrides the sunblind output. The override is canceled by setting the
.function field to SET_NULL.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
191
LOYTEC
nviOccupSensor
Type
SNVT_occupancy
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input provides the occupancy state measured by an occupancy sensor. A
hold time can be configured using the configuration property nciHoldTime.
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Ignored
Ignored
nviOccManCmd
Type
SNVT_occupancy
Valid Range
OC_NUL (-1):
OC_OCCUPIED (0):
OC_UNOCCUPIED (1):
OC_BYPASS (2):
OC_STANDBY (3):
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable input can be used to manually control the occupancy state.
Invalid Value
Area is occupied
Area is unoccupied
Area is temporarily occupied for the bypass period
Ignored
Value
Description
OC_NUL
This is the initial value after power-up and it remains until another
value is received. It is used to indicate that this network variable
input is invalid, unused or to cancel a previous command.
OC_OCCUPIED
The sunblind controller should operate in the occupied mode.
OC_UNOCCUPIED
The sunblind controller should operate in the unoccupied mode
OC_BYPASS
The sunblind controller should operate in the occupied mode for a
period of time defined by nciBypassTime.
nviGlare
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1,-1
On:
Off:
Auto
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
.state=0 and .value=0
.state=-1
Default Value
Description
Version 2.0.1
This network variable is used to override the automatic glare detection algorithm (see Section
7.2.9.1).
Value
Description
On
Glare condition.
Off
No glare condition.
Auto
Use automatic glare detection algorithm.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
192
LOYTEC
7.2.9.11 Output Network Variables
nvoSblndSetting
Type
SNVT_setting
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable output provides the setpoint for the sunblind actuator.
nvoSblndState
Type
SNVT_sblnd_state
Valid Range
.pos.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
SET_DOWN (2)
SET_UP (3)
SET_STOP (4)
SET_STATE (5)
.pos.setting:
.pos.rotation:
.cmd_source:
.error_code:
Invalid Value
Decrease setting by specified value
Increase setting by specified value
Stop action
Setting on at specified value
0..100, resolution 0.5
-359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
SBCS_NUL, SBCS_LOCAL, SBCS_GROUP, …
SBE_NUL, SBE_NO_ERROR, SBE_IN_PROGRESS, …
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable output provides the setpoint for the sunblind actuator and reports errors and
the cause of the latest change (as determined by the sunblind controller).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
193
LOYTEC
nvoSBMode
Type
SNVT_state_64
Valid Range
.bit0:
.bit1:
.bit2:
.bit3:
.bit4:
.bit5:
.bit6:
.bit7:
.bit8:
.bit9:
.bit10:
.bit11:
.bit12:
.bit13:
.bit14:
.bit15:
.bit16:
.bit17:
.bit18:
.bit19:
…
.bit64:
Heat/cool request
Up if occupied
Constant light request
View protection
Anti-glare
Scene selection
Global control
Group control
Local control
Window open
Override request
Set override request
Rain condition
Wind
Frost condition
Window sensor alarm
Weather sensor alarm
Maintenance request
Set maintenance request
Not used
Not used
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable output reports the active events of the sunblind controller (see Section
7.2.9.9).
nvoSBStateFB
Type
SNVT_sblnd_state
Valid Range
.pos.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
SET_OFF (0):
SET_ON (1)
SET_DOWN (2)
SET_UP (3)
SET_STOP (4)
SET_STATE (5)
.pos.setting:
.pos.rotation:
.cmd_source:
.error_code:
Invalid Value
Setting off
Setting on
Decrease setting by specified value
Increase setting by specified value
Stop action
Setting on at specified value
0..100, resolution 0.5
-359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
SBCS_NUL, SBCS_LOCAL, SBCS_GROUP, …
SBE_NUL, SBE_NO_ERROR, SBE_IN_PROGRESS, …
Default Value
-
Description
This network variable output provides a feedback to a SCADA system:
Version 2.0.1

If the sunblind actuator provides a feedback variable of type SNVT_sblnd_state and it is
bound to nviSBStateFB the sunblind actuator feedback value is copied to nvoSBStateFB.

If this is not the case, but the sunblind actuator provides a feedback variable of type
SNVT_setting and it is bound to nviSBSettingFB the value is copied to nvoSBStateFB with
the cmd_source field copied from the nvoSblndState.

If none of the above is the case, the value of nvoSblndState is copied to nvoSBStateFB.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
194
LOYTEC
7.2.9.12 Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
nciLocation
Type
SCPTLocation (SNVT_str_asc)
Valid Range
31 ASCII characters
Default Value
Sunblind Ctrl X
Description
This configuration property can be used to specify the name of the sunblind controller.
nciMaxSendTime
Type
SCPTmaxSendTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0 sec
Description
Maximum time between updates for the nvoSblndSetting and nvoSblndState outputs (heartbeat
functionality).
nciMaxRcvTime
Type
SCPTmaxRcvTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (disabled)
Description
This configuration property specifies the expected update interval of the nviWindowContact
network variable input. If the time elapses without an update of the variable an alarm is generated
and the sunblind adopts the safe position defined by the nciWinConFailPos.
nciWinConFailPos
Type
SCPTdefaultSetting (SNVT_setting)
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
SET_STATE, 0%, 0 deg
Description
This configuration property defines the safety position of a sunblind when a failure of the window
contact (nviWindowContact) has been detected.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
195
LOYTEC
nciBypassTime
Type
SCPTbypassTime (SNVT_time_min)
Valid Range
0..65,535 minutes
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the amount of time that the sunblind controller is in bypass
(occupancy) mode following a single bypass request via nviOccManCmd. Additional bypass
requests can restart the timer. Setting this configuration property to zero disables the bypass
function and no bypass takes place.
nciOverrideValue
Type
SCPTdefaultSetting (SNVT_setting)
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
SET_NUL
Description
This configuration property defines the override value which is adopts by the sunblind when the
nviOverride is at ON.
nciMaintValue
Type
SCPTdefaultSetting (SNVT_setting)
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
SET_NUL
Description
This configuration property defines the maintenance value which is adopts by the sunblind when
the nviMaintenance is at ON.
nciDriveDelay
Type
UCPTdriveDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (no delay)
Description
This configuration property defines the delay which the sunblind controller waits before it updates
its outputs. If different drive delays are configured for the different sunblind controllers, the
sunblinds will not drive at the same time avoiding a power peak. No drive delay is applied for
local control (nviLocalControl).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
196
LOYTEC
nciSlHiLimGlare
Type
UCPTsunLuxHighLimit (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
30000
Description
This configuration property defines the high limit for the sun lux level input used by the automatic
glare detection algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.1)
nciSlLoLimGlare
Type
UCPTsunLuxHighLimit (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
10000
Description
This configuration property defines the low limit for the sun lux level input used by the automatic
glare detection algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.1)
nciMinAzimuth
Type
UCPTminAzimuth (SNVT_angle_deg)
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the minimum azimuth for the sun elevation input used by the
automatic glare detection algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.1).
nciMaxAzimuth
Type
UCPTmaxAzimuth (SNVT_angle_deg)
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the maximum azimuth for the sun elevation input used by the
automatic anti-glare algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.1).
nciBladeDist
Type
UCPTbladeDistance (SNVT_length_mil)
Valid Range
0 ... 6533.5 mm
Resolution: 0.1 mm
Default Value
7 cm
Description
This configuration property defines the distance between sunblind blades (see Section 7.2.9.1).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
197
LOYTEC
nciBladeWidth
Type
UCPTbladeWidth (SNVT_length_mil)
Valid Range
0 ... 6533.5 mm
Resolution: 0.1 mm
Default Value
9 cm
Description
This configuration property defines the width of the sunblind blades (see Section 7.2.9.1).
nciRotOffset
Type
UCPTrotationOffset (SNVT_angle_deg)
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the rotation offset for the glare protection algorithm (see
Section 7.2.9.1).
nciMaxRot
Type
UCPTmaxRotation (SNVT_angle_deg)
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
90
Description
This configuration property defines the maximum rotation for the glare protection algorithm (see
Section 7.2.9.1).
nciMinRot
Type
UCPTminRotation (SNVT_angle_deg)
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
0
Description
This configuration property defines the minimum rotation for the glare protection algorithm (see
Section 7.2.9.1).
nciDeltaTemp
Type
SCPTminDeltaTemp (SNVT_temp_p)
Valid Range
-273.17°C...327.66°C
Resolution: 0.01°C
Default Value
1°C
Description
This configuration property defines the amount by which the indoor temperature (nviIndoorTemp)
value must change before it can take in account.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
198
LOYTEC
nciHoldTime
Type
SCPTholdTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
600 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the hold time for the occupied state.
nciSblndEvtPrio
Type
UCPTsunblindEventPriority
Valid Range
.heat_cool_req:
.up_if_occupied:
.constant_light_req:
.view_protect:
.glare:
.scene_sel:
.global_req:
.group_req:
.local_req:
.window:
.override_req:
.set_override_req:
.rain:
.wind:
.frost:
.window_sensor_alarm:
.weather_sensor_alarm:
.maintenance_req:
.set_maintenance_req:
Default Value
All 0
Description
This configuration property defines the priorities of sunblind events (see Section 7.2.9.9). Higher
values render higher priority.
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
-128..127
If multiple events have the same priority then they are prioritized with the default priority.
Events can be disabled by setting a negative value for its priority.
Events maintenance_req and set_maintenance_req will always be the highest priority events.
Their value is used to define which of the two events has the higher priority.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
199
LOYTEC
nciAutoEvMinTm
Type
UCPTautoDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
600 sec
Description
Use to specify the minimum time for the following events:

Weather sensor alarm

Window sensor alarm

Frost condition

Wind

Rain condition

Window open

Anti-glare

View protection

Constant light request

Up if occupied

Heating/cooling request
The event will stay active for at least the configured time even if the event condition disappears
before this time expires. In this way the sun blind controller ensures that the sunblind does not
drive too frequently.
nciCLNumber
Type
UCPTobjectIndex (SNVT_count)
Valid Range
0..15
0xFFFF invalid
Default Value
0xFFFF (no Constant Light Controller linked)
Description
This configuration property specifies the index of the constant light controller that is linked to the
sunblind controller (see Section 7.2.8.7 und 7.2.8.8).
Object indices start with index 0.
7.2.10 Globals #0005
The L-DALI provides one Globals object for each DALI channel. It provides global network
variable inputs and configuration properties which are not specific for a certain constant
light controller or sunblind controller.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
200
LOYTEC
Globals #5
nviGlobalGlare
SNVT_state
nviGlobalShadow
SNVT_state
nviWindSpeed
SNVT_speed
nviSunLux
SNVT_lux
nviRain
SNVT_switch
nviFrost
SNVT_switch
nviDawn
SNVT_switch
nviDusk
SNVT_switch
nviOutdoorTemp
SNVT_temp_p
nviSunElevation
SNVT_angle_deg
nviSunAzimuth
SNVT_angle_deg
nciWindRcvT
nciWindOffDelay
nciFrostRcvT
nciWeaSenFailPos
nciTermTempHyst
nciSlHiLimTerm
nciViewProtHyst
nciWindLimit
nciRainRcvT
nciRaiFroOffDly
nciInvWinCon
nciTermSLHyst
nciSlLoLimTerm
Figure 152: Global Object
7.2.10.1 Network Variable Inputs
nviGlobalGlare
Type
SNVT_state
Valid Range
.bit0
…
.bit15
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
Description
Version 2.0.1
This network input permits an external calculation of glare condition for all of the 16 sunblind
controllers per channel (see Section 7.2.9.1). Automatic glare protection for the sunblind
controller object x is deactivated if the bit with index x is not set.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
201
LOYTEC
nviGlobalShadow
Type
SNVT_state
Valid Range
.bit0
…
.bit15
0, 1
0, 1
Default Value
Description
This network input permits an external calculation of shadow condition for all of the 16 sunblind
controllers per channel (see Section 7.2.9.1). Automatic glare protection for the sunblind
controller object x is deactivated if the bit with index x is set.
nviWindSpeed
Type
SNVT_speed
Valid Range
0..6553.5 m/s
Resolution: 0.1 m/s
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the current wind speed measured by a wind sensor.
If the wind speed is higher than the value configured in nciWindLimit, the sunblinds must go up.
nviSunLux
Type
SNVT_lux
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the current outdoor illumination measured by a light sensor.
nviRain
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
Rain:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
No Rain: .state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the rain status.
If it is raining, the sunblinds must go up.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
202
LOYTEC
nviFrost
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
Frost:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
No Frost: .state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the frost status.
If a frost condition is detected, the sunblinds must not move.
nviDawn
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
Dawn:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
No Dawn: .state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
Currently not used.
nviDusk
Type
SNVT_switch
Valid Range
.value:
.state:
0..100%
0, 1
Dusk:
.state=1 and .value>=0.5%
No Dusk: .state=0 and .value=0
Default Value
Description
Currently not used.
nviOutdoorTemp
Type
SNVT_temp_p
Valid Range
-273.17°C..327.66°C
Resolution: 0.01°C
Default Value
Description
Version 2.0.1
This network variable input provides the current outdoor temperature. This input is used when the
sunblinds are used to heat/cool a room (see Section 7.2.9.3).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
203
LOYTEC
nviSunElevation
Type
SNVT_angle_deg
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the current sun elevation. The elevation is the angle between
the horizon and the middle of the sun, considered out of the viewpoint of an observer.
The values 0 – 90° are typically used (0= Sunrise/Sunset; 90 = zenith position).
nviSunAzimuth
Type
SNVT_angle_deg
Valid Range
-359.98..360.00 deg
Resolution: 0.02 deg
Default Value
Description
This network variable input provides the current sun azimuth.
The values 0 – 359° are typically used (0 = NORTH, 90 = EAST, 180 = SOUTH, 270 = WEST).
7.2.10.2 Configuration Properties
All configuration properties listed in this section are implemented as Configuration
Parameters using configuration files (CPT, CPV, and CPC files). File access is provided via
LonMark FTP.
nciWindRcvT
Type
SCPTmaxRcvTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (disabled)
Description
This configuration property specifies the expected update interval of the nviWindspeed network
variable input. If the time elapses without an update of the variable an alarm is generated and the
sunblinds adopt the safe position defined by nciWeaSenFailPos.
nciWindLimit
Type
UCPTwindLimit (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the maximum wind for the sunblinds. If the current wind
speed (nviWindspeed) is greater than the configured values the sunblinds must go up.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
204
LOYTEC
nciWindOffDelay
Type
UCPTweaSenOffDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the time for which the current wind speed (nviWindspeed)
must be below the critical wind speed (nciWindLimit) before the sunblind controller return to
normal operation.
nciRainRcvT
Type
SCPTmaxRcvTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (disabled)
Description
This configuration property specifies the expected update interval of the nviRain network variable
input. If the time elapses without an update of the variable an alarm is generated and the sunblinds
adopt the safe position defined by nciWeaSenFailPos.
nciFrostRcvT
Type
SCPTmaxRcvTime (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec (disabled)
Description
This configuration property specifies the expected update interval of the nviFrost network
variable input. If the time elapses without an update of the variable an alarm is generated and the
sunblinds adopt the safe position defined by nciWeaSenFailPos.
nciRaiFroOffDly
Type
UCPTweaSenOffDelay (SNVT_time_sec)
Valid Range
0..6553.4 sec
Resolution: 0.1 sec
Default Value
0.0 sec
Description
This configuration property defines the time for which the rain/frost condition (nviRain/nviFrost)
has to be inactive before the sunblind controller returns to normal operation.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
205
LOYTEC
nciWeaSenFailPos
Type
SCPTdefaultSetting (SNVT_setting)
Valid Range
.function:
SET_NUL (-1):
Invalid Value
SET_DOWN (2) Decrease setting by specified value
SET_UP (3)
Increase setting by specified value
SET_STOP (4)
Stop action
SET_STATE (5) Setting on at specified value
.setting: 0..100, resolution 0.5
.rotation: -359.98 .. 360.00, resolution 0.02
Default Value
SET_STATE, 0%, 0 deg
Description
This configuration property defines the safety position of sunblinds when a failure of a safety
relevant weather sensor (e.g. nviWindspeed, nviRain or nviFrost) is detected.
nciInvWinCon
Type
UCPTautoOffBreak (SNVT_lev_disc)
Valid Range
ST_ON, ST_OFF
Inverted: ST_ON
Not Inverted: ST_OFF
Default Value
ST_OFF (not inverted)
Description
This configuration property allows inverting the window contact inputs of the sunblind controllers
(nviWindowContact).
nciTermTempHyst
Type
SCPTtemperatureHysteresis (SNVT_temp_diff_p)
Valid Range
-327.68°C..327.66°C
Resolution: 0.01°C
Default Value
1°C
Description
This configuration property defines the hysteresis for the outdoor temperature (nviOutdoorTemp).
It is used for the heating/cooling algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.3).
nciTermSLHyst
Type
UCPTterminalLoadSLhysteresis (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
5.0%
Description
This configuration property defines the hysteresis for the sun lux level input (nviSunLux). It is
used by the heating/cooling algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.3).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
206
LOYTEC
nciSlHighLimTerm
Type
UCPTsunLuxHighLimit (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
30000
Description
This configuration property defines the high limit for the sun lux level input (nviSunLux). It is
used by the heating/cooling algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.3).
nciSlLowLimTerm
Type
UCPTsunLuxLowLimit (SNVT_lux)
Valid Range
0..65,335 lux
Default Value
10000 lux
Description
This configuration property defines the low limit for the sun lux level input (nviSunLux). It is used
by the heating/cooling algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.3).
nciViewProtHyst
Type
UCPTviewProtectionSLhysteresis (SNVT_lev_cont)
Valid Range
0..100%
Resolution: 0.5
Default Value
5.0%
Description
This configuration property defines the hysteresis for the sun lux level input (nviSunLux). It is
used by the view protection algorithm (see Section 7.2.9.2).
7.3 BACnet Interface (LDALI-ME20X only)
Similar to the CEA-709 interface, the BACnet interface allows controlling DALI ballasts
and access information from DALI ballasts and sensors via BACnet objects and properties.
Additional properties allow configuring the built-in light controller applications (constant
light, staircase lighting, etc.).
The objects can be grouped in the following categories:
DALI ballasts


Analog Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.10):
-
Control output light level.
-
Configure DALI ballast parameters.
-
Configure light application parameters (staircase lighting, etc.).
Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.3.11): Output light level feedback.
DALI groups

Version 2.0.1
Analog Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.10):
-
Control output light level.
-
Configure light application parameters (staircase lighting, etc.).

Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.3.11): Output light level feedback.

Multi-State Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.12): Scene control.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
207
LOYTEC

Accumulator objects (see Section 7.3.3.13): Accumulated energy usage (calculated).

Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.3.14): Status and health state of group.
DALI channels

Analog Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.10):
-
Control output light level.
-
Configure light application parameters (staircase lighting, etc.).

Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.3.11): Output light level feedback.

Multi-State Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.12): Scene control.

Accumulator objects (see Section 7.3.3.13): Accumulated energy usage (calculated).

Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.3.14): Status and health state of channel.
DALI sensors

Analog Input objects (see Section 7.3.4.2): Lux level sensor value.

Binary input objects (see Section 7.3.4.3): Occupancy sensor value.
Constant Light Controller

Loop objects (see Section 7.3.5.5)
All properties not specifically mentioned in the following sections behave as described by
the BACnet standard.
7.3.1 Interface Version
The BACnet interface can be used in two different modes:
Firmware version 1.x compatible interface
This interface is provided for backward compatibility with projects set up with a L-DALI
with firmware version before 2.0.
Full featured interface
This interface is recommended for new projects.
The main difference between the two interface versions is the instance number layout. The
“Full featured interface” offers better human readability. Further, new features in future
firmware versions may be only available via the full featured interface.
The interface version can be configured via the Web-UI page “Config/System” (see Section
4.2.1).
7.3.2 Device Object
The BACnet interface provides one device object as shown in Table 15. The following
Sections describe the device object’s properties in detail, subsuming related properties in a
single Section in order to provide a coherent overview.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
208
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Vendor_Name
CharacterString
R
Vendor_Identifier
Unsigned16
R
Model_Name
CharacterString
R
Firmware_Revision
CharacterString
R
Application_Software_Version
CharacterString
R
Location
CharacterString
W
Description
CharacterString
W
Protocol_Version
Unsigned
R
Protocol_Revision
Unsigned
R
Protocol_Services_Supported
BACnetServicesSupported
R
Protocol_Object_Types_Supported
BACnetObjectTypesSupported
R
Object_List
BACnetARRAY[N] of
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Database_Revision
Unsigned
R
Max_APDU_Length_Accepted
Unsigned
R
Segmentation_Supported
BACnetSegmentation
R
Max_Segments_Accepted
Unsigned
R
APDU_Segment_Timeout
Unsigned
W
APDU_Timeout
Unsigned
W
Number_Of_APDU_Retries
Unsigned
W
Max_Master
Unsigned(1..127)
R
Max_Info_Frames
Unsigned
R
System_Status
BACnetDeviceStatus
R
Device_Address_Binding
List of BACnetAddressBinding
R
Active_COV_Subscriptions
List of BACnetCOVSubscription
R
UTC_Offset
Integer
W
Daylight_Savings_Status
Boolean
R
Local_Date
Date
R
Local_Time
Time
R
Time_Synchronization_Recipients
List of BACnetRecipient
W
UTC_Time_Synchronization_Recipiens
List of BACnetRecipient
W
Time_Synchronization_Interval
Unsigned
W
Align_Interval
Boolean
W
Interval_Offset
Unsigned
W
Configuration_Files
BACnetARRAY[N] of
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Last_Restore_Time
BACnetTimeStamp
R
Table 15: Properties of the Device Object.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.2.1
209
LOYTEC
Device Name and ID
The following properties of the Device object, which are part of every BACnet object,
identify the device uniquely.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only). This property, of type BACnetObjectIdentifier, is a
numeric code that is used to identify the object. For the Device object, the object identifier
must be unique internetwork-wide.
The Object_Type part of the Object_Identifier of the Device object is 8 (= DEVICE). The
instance part of the Object_Identifier of the Device object is configurable via the
configuration UI (see Section 4.2.7). The default value is 17800.
Object_Name (Read-Only). The name of the object. The value of Object_Name of the
Device object is configurable via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.7). For the Device
object, this name shall be unique within the BACnet internetwork.
Object_Type (Read-Only). The object’s type. For the Device object, the value of this
property is 8 (= DEVICE).
7.3.2.2
Device Information
A whole set of properties provides general purpose information about the device.
Vendor_Name (Read-Only). The value of this property is “LOYTEC electronics GmbH”.
Vendor_Identifier (Read-Only). A numerical value identifying the BACnet vendor. The
value of this property is 178.
Model_Name (Read-Only). The value of this property is equal to the product code of the
device (“LDALI-ME204”).
Firmware_Revision (Read-Only). The value of this property gives the current BACnet
module version used on the device.
Application_Software_Version (Read-Only). The value of this property gives the build
date and the version of the current application on the device.
Location (Read-Writable). A string intended to be used to describe the physical location
of the device, e.g., “1st floor”. This property can be set via the configuration UI (see Section
4.2.7). The default value is “unknown”.
Description (Read-Only). A string intended to be used to describe the device’s purpose.
This property can be changed via the configuration UI (see Section and 4.2.7).
Protocol_Version (Read-Only). The BACnet protocol version supported by the device.
The value of this property is 1.
Protocol_Revision (Read-Only). The BACnet protocol revision of the BACnet version
supported by the device. The value of this property is 6.
Protocol_Services_Supported (Read-Only). A string of bits marking which BACnet
services can be executed by the device. For a detailed list of the BACnet services supported,
please refer to the product’s PICS document.
Protocol_Object_Types_Supported (Read-Only). A string of bits identifying which
BACnet object types are supported by the device. For a detailed list of supported object
types, please refer to the product’s PICS document.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.2.3
210
LOYTEC
Object Database
The following properties provide information about the BACnet objects contained in the
device.
Object_List (Read-Only). This property holds a BACnetARRAY of object IDs (object type,
object instance pairs), one object ID for each object within the device that is accessible
through BACnet services.
Database_Revision (Read-Only). This property, of type Unsigned, is a logical revision
number for the device’s object database. It is incremented when an object is created, an
object is deleted, an object’s name is changed, an object’s Object_Identifier property is
changed, or a restore is performed.
7.3.2.4
Protocol Parameters
BACnet protocol parameters are accessible via the properties listed below.
Max_APDU_Length_Accepted (Read-Only). The maximal size of an APDU (Application
Protocol Data Unit) accepted by the device. The value of this property is 487 if BACnet
MS/TP is used and 1476 if BACnet/IP is used.
Segmentation_Supported (Read-Only). The value of this property indicates whether and
which kind of segmentation is supported by a device. The value of this property is
SEGMENTED_BOTH.
Max_Segments_Accepted (Read-Only). The maximum numbers of segments accepted by
a device. The value of this property is 16.
APDU_Segment_Timeout (Read-Writable). Timeout in milliseconds allowed between
segments. The value of this property is 2000 milliseconds by default. On MS/TP networks,
this value should be increased to 40000 (40 sec).
APDU_Timeout (Read-Writable). Time in milliseconds the device waits for an answer
before retrying or giving up on a request; also see Number_Of_APDU_Retries. The value of
this property is 3000 milliseconds. On MS/TP networks, this value should be increased to
60000 (1 min).
Number_Of_APDU_Retries (Read-Writable). The number of times the device will try to
re-send a packet before giving up on a request; also see APDU_Timeout. The value of this
property is 3 by default.
Max_Master (Read-Writable). This property is only present if BACnet MS/TP is enabled.
It defines maximal MS/TP MAC number at which the device expects an MS/TP master.
The value of this property is configurable via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.7) and
must be in the range 1-127.. The default value of this property is 127.
Max_Info_Frames (Read-Writable). This property is only present if BACnet MS/TP is
enabled. It defines the maximal number of MS/TP packets the device can send when it
holds the MS/TP token. Increasing this value will increase latency on the MS/TP network.
The value of this property is configurable via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.7). The
default value of this property is 1.
7.3.2.5
Diagnostics
Several properties provide run-time information about the device.
System_Status (Read-Only). The value of this property is always OPERATIONAL.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
211
LOYTEC
Device_Address_Binding (Read-Only). This property contains a list of bindings between
BACnet device instance numbers (the instance number part of the Device object ID) and
BACnet addresses. This property tells a user which BACnet address the device will actually
use when trying to communicate with another device known only by its device instance
number. This information can be helpful when diagnosing network configuration problems.
Important!
A BACnet address consists of the BACnet network number, which is 0 for the local
network, and the BACnet MAC address of the device.
In particular problems exist, if two or more devices in the network have been wrongly
assigned the same device instance number. In this case two BACnetAddressBinding entries
with the same instance number but different BACnet addresses will be listed—provided the
ambiguous instance number is in some way required by the device (e.g., by a client
mapping).
Important!
Bindings between device instance numbers and BACnet addresses are only listed in
Device_Address_Binding if they are actually required by a given configuration, and are
currently known or ambiguous.
Active_COV_Subscriptions (Read-Only). This property lists currently active COV
subscriptions.. Each entry of type BACnetCOVSubscription provides information about the
recipient address, the monitored property ID, whether notification are confirmed or
unconfirmed, the remaining time of the subscription, and optionally the COV increment.
Whenever the device receives a COV subscription via one of the services SubscribeCOV or
SubscribeCOVProperty, a new entry is added to the list or an existing entry is updated (resubscription). An entry is removed from the list when a subscription terminates, either
because it times out or because it was actively unsubscribed by the subscriber.
7.3.2.6
Date & Time
The device’s time and date are exposed to the network via the following set of properties.
UTC_Offset (Read-Writable). This Integer value specifies the time difference between
local time and UTC in minutes. The value of this property is configurable via the
configuration UI (see Section 4.2.1).
Important!
Note that UTC_Offset is relative to local time and not relative to UTC, i.e., a time zone
offset of GMT+1 (Berlin, Paris, Vienna) corresponds to UTC_Offset being set to -60
(minutes).
Daylight_Savings_Status (Read-Only). This Boolean value indicates whether (TRUE) or
not (FALSE) daylight saving correction of the local time is currently active. The daylight
saving scheme is configurable via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.1).
Local_Date (Read-Only). The current date according to the device’s clock. The value of
this property can be changed via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.1).
Local_Time (Read-Only). The current time according to the device’s clock. The value of
this property can be changed via the configuration UI (see Section 4.2.1).
7.3.2.7
Time Master
The device can serve as a BACnet time master, i.e., it can issue TimeSynchronization and
UTCTimeSynchronization request on time synchronization events. A time synchronization
event occurs after rebooting, when the device’s clock changes, or, if so configured, the
event is generated periodically. The following properties are used to configure the time
master.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
212
LOYTEC
Time_Synchronization_Recipients (Read-Writable). This list of recipients will receive
TimeSynchronization requests on time synchronization events. A recipient is either
specified by its device ID (the object ID of its Device object), or its BACnet address. By
default, this list is empty.
UTC_Time_Synchronization_Recipients (Read-Writable). This list of recipients will
receive UTCTimeSynchronization requests on time synchronization events. A recipient is
either specified by its device ID (the object ID of its Device object), or its BACnet address.
By default, this list is empty.
Time_Synchronization_Interval (Read-Writable). The Unsigned value of this property
specifies the time interval in minutes in which periodic time synchronization events are
created. If set to zero, no periodic time synchronization events are generated.
The actual clock time at which periodic time synchronization events are generated is
determined by the properties Time_Synchronization_Interval, Align_Interval, and
Interval_Offset; Table 16 outlines how these properties interact.
Time_Synchronization_Interval
Align_Intervals
Periodc Time Synchronization Event At…
Multiple of 1440 (minutes), i.e.,
multiple of one day
TRUE
Interval_Offset minutes after midnight, every
(Time_Synchronization_Interval/1440) days
Multiple of 60 (minutes) but not
multiple of 1440 (minutes), i.e.,
multiple of one hour
TRUE
Interval_Offset minutes from the current* hour,
every (Time_Synchronization_Interval/60)
hours
Multiple of 1440 (minutes), i.e.,
multiple of one day
FALSE
Interval_Offset minutes from the current*
minute, every
(Time_Synchronization_Interval/1440) days
Multiple of 60 (minutes), but not
multiple of 1440 (minutes), i.e.,
multiple of one hour
FALSE
Interval_Offset minutes from the current*
minute, every
(Time_Synchronization_Interval/60) hours
Neither multiple of 60 or 1440,
but greater than zero
TRUE or
FALSE
Interval_Offset minutes from the current*
minute, every Time_Synchronization_Interval
minutes
Zero
TRUE or
FALSE
Never
Table 16: Periodic time synchronization events are parameterized by the properties
Time_Synchronization_Interval, Align_Interval, and Interval_Offset.
*
Current hour or minute refers to the hour or minute at which one of the properties
Time_Synchronization_Interval, Align_Interval, and Interval_Offset is written, e.g., the hour or
minute the device completes the boot process or one of these properties is modified via BACnet
services.
By default, the value of Time_Synchronization_Interval is 1440 (minutes), i.e., one day.
Align_Intervals (Read-Writable). The Boolean value of this property determines whether
or not periodic time synchronization events shall be anchored at the start of a day or hour
(TRUE) or not (FALSE), provided Time_Synchronization_Interval is a multiple of a day
(1440 minutes) or hour (60 minutes). Table 16 details on how this property influences
generating periodic time synchronization events. The default value of this property is
TRUE.
Interval_Offset (Read-Writable). While Time_Synchronization_Interval specifies the
period in which time synchronization events are generated, the Unsigned value of this
property determines the point of time in minutes within this interval at which the time
synchronization event is actually triggered. If the value of Interval_Offset is larger than the
value of Time_Synchronization_Interval, the remainder of Interval_Offset divided by
Time_Synchronization_Interval is used. The default value of this property is 0.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.2.8
213
LOYTEC
Backup & Restore
The following properties are related to backup & restore procedures.
Configuration_Files (Read-Only). The contents of this property is an array of object IDs
of File objects that can backed-up or restored during a BACnet backup or restore procedure.
Outside a BACnet backup or restore procedure, this property is empty. After a BACnet
backup or restore procedure has been initiated, it contains the object ID (File, 0), i.e., the
File object whose instance number is 0.
Last_Restore_Time (Read-Only). The BACnetTimeStamp of the last restore procedure.
7.3.3 Light Output Objects
There are three different types of light output objects:
7.3.3.1

Objects related to DALI lamps (64 per channel).

Objects related to DALI groups (16 per channel).

Objects related to the DALI channels (1 per channel).
Control
The L-DALI offers different methods to control lamps.
Individual Control
Each lamp can be controlled individually via the Present_Value property of the
corresponding Analog Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.10). Any new value received is
transmitting to the corresponding DALI lamp in the dimming mode configured with the
Mode property of the object (property Fade_Time or Ramp_Rate respectively is used to
determine dim speed).
Group Control
Lamps belonging to a group can be controlled together by the following means:

Dimming: Any new value received via the Present_Value property of the
corresponding Analog Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.10) is transmitting to the
corresponding DALI group in the dimming mode configured with the Mode
property of the object (property Fade_Time or Ramp_Rate respectively is used to
determine dim speed).

Scene control: Using the Present_Value property of the corresponding Multi-State
Output objects (see Section 7.3.3.12) up to 16 DALI scenes can be saved and
recalled. The states “STORE SCENE x” store the current light levels of all lamps of
the group in the specified scene number ‘x’. By setting the state to “GO TO
SCENE x” previously stored scenes can be recalled. Scenes can be deleted by a
using the states “REMOVE SCENE x”. When a new scene is selected the lamp
values are adjusted in fading mode (property Fade_Time is used).
Channel Control
All lamps on the same DALI channel can be controlled together by the following means:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.3.2
214
LOYTEC

Dimming: The Present_Value property of the corresponding Analog Output
objects works in the same way as for lamps and groups but affects all lamps on a
channel.

Scene control: The Present_Value property of the corresponding Multi-State
Output objects works in the same way as for groups but affects all lamps on a
channel.
Maximum and Minimum Light Level
For a dimmable lamp the maximum and minimum light level of a lamp can be configured
via the properties Min_Level and Max_Pres_Value of the corresponding Analog Output
object.
For a non-dimmable lamp set Min_Level = Max_Pres_Value = 100%.
7.3.3.3
Timing Parameters
Figure 153 shows the behavior of the lamp actuator if the light is switched on/off via one of
the Analog Output objects. When the ON command is received, the lamp is switched to the
specified value after the time On_Delay_Time has expired. When the lamp is already on and
a new ON command is received the lamp is switched to the new value immediately. If the
lamp is on and an OFF command is received the lamp is switched off after the time
Off_Delay_Time.
Figure 153: Timing Parameters.
For staircase lighting an automatic cutoff can be configured in Auto_Off_Time as shown in
Figure 154. When this time expires, the lamp switches off automatically. To warn the user
that the light is going to turn off, an off-warning delay (Warn_Delay) can be configured.
During this time the light is dimmed to 50% of the previous level. For non-dimmable lights
(Min_Level=Max_Pres_Value) the light is blinking.
Figure 154: Timing Parameters with Auto_Off_Time and Warn_Delay.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
215
LOYTEC
The behavior of the auto-off timer can be modified with the property Auto_Off_Mode. If
Auto_Off_Mode is set to ENABLE_RESTART or ENABLE_RESTART_BREAK, the autooff timer can be restarted by a new ON command (see Figure 155). If Auto_Off_Mode is set
ENABLE_BREAK or ENABLE_RESTART_BREAK the auto-off timer can be stopped
before the time has expired by switching the light off via the corresponding Present_Value
property (see Figure 156).
Figure 155: Timing Parameters (restart enabled).
Figure 156: Timing Parameters (break enabled).
7.3.3.4
Feedback
The DALI lamp, group and channel each report the current state via the Present_Value of a
feedback Analog Input (see Section 7.3.3.11).
All Analog Output objects report if they are in manual override mode by setting the
OVERRIDDEN flag in the Status_Flags property.
7.3.3.5
Emergency Lights
The following additional, emergency light related properties are available via the Channel
Health Analog Input object (see Section 7.3.3.14):
Version 2.0.1

Battery_Failure: Report battery failure for each emergency light ballast.

Function_Test_Failure: Report whether last function test failed for each emergency
light ballast.

Duration_Test_Failure: Report whether last function test failed for each emergency
light ballast.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.3.6
216
LOYTEC
Status Monitoring
The L-DALI monitors the DALI lamps and reports any failure in the property
Device_Failure of the Channel Health Analog Input object (see Section 7.3.3.14). In this
property of type BIT STRING each bit corresponds to the lamp with the same index. In case
of a failure the bit is set. Similar properties Lamp_Failure and Ballast_Failure are used to
signal a lamp or a ballast failure reported by a ballast for each DALI ballast.
A device failure is reported if either

bus power for the related DALI channel fails,

the DALI ballast is not reachable via the DALI channel, or

the DALI ballast reports a failure (e.g. lamp failure) in its DALI status register.
The Present_Value properties of the group and channel related Analog Input objects (see
Section 7.3.3.14) reflect the percentage of failed ballasts in this group or channel
respectively.
7.3.3.7
Statistics
The L-DALI reports the run hours and energy consumptions of the DALI lamps.
Run Hours
The L-DALI determines how long each DALI lamp was switched on. The value is reported
via the property Elapsed_Active_Time of the Analog Output object for each lamp, group,
and channel (see Section 7.3.3.10). If a lamp is replaced the run hours can be initialized by
writing 0 to this property. The time and date of the last reset is stored in the property
Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset.
The group related object reports the maximum run hours of all lamps in the groups via the
property Elapsed_Active_Time.
The channel related object reports the maximum run hours of all lamps on the channel via
the property Elapsed_Active_Time.
Energy Consumption
The L-DALI device can calculate the energy consumption of the DALI lamps. For that
purpose it needs to know the nominal power of all connected DALI lamps. If the
configuration property Nominal_Power of a lamp related Analog Output object (see Section
7.3.3.10) is set to 0 (AUTO), the L-DALI tries to obtain the energy consumption from the
DALI device. However, not all DALI ballasts support this proprietary extension. In this case
the Nominal_Power r has to be configured with the nominal power of the ballast.
To reduce the number of objects the energy consumption is reported not separately for each
lamp but for a whole group or channel. Accumulator objects (see Section 7.3.3.13) are used
to report the sum of energy consumed by all lamps in a group or on a channel respectively.
The energy consumption can be reset by writing to the Value_Set property of the
Accumulator object
7.3.3.8
Burn-In Function
Some lamps require a burn-in time during which they must not be dimmed. The burn-in
mode can be activated/deactivated via the Web-UI. The burn-in time is defined by the
property Burn_In_Time available via Analog Output objects corresponding to DALI
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
217
LOYTEC
channels (see Section 7.3.3.10). During this time the lamps will only be switched to on
(100%) or off (0%) but not dimmed.
7.3.3.9
Fail Safe Functions
The light level a lamp adopts after power-up is defined in the property Power_On_Level.
The light level a lamp adopts in case of a DALI system failure is defined in the
configuration property System_Failure_Level. Both are available via Analog Output objects
corresponding to DALI ballasts (see Section 7.3.3.10).
7.3.3.10 Analog Output Object – Control DALI ballast, group, or channel
This object type is used to control the dim level of DALI ballasts (see Table 17), DALI
groups (see Table 18), or DALI channel (see Table 19). For DALI devices it also provides
access to all its DALI parameters. Further, parameters for light controller applications are
available (e.g. staircase lighting, on and off delays, off warning etc.).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
218
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
W
Description
CharacterString
W
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
W
Priority_Array
BACnetPriorityArray
R
Relinquish_Default
REAL
W
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Profile_Name
CharacterString
R
Power_On_Level (512)
REAL
W
System_Failure_Level (513)
REAL
W
Fade_Time (514)
Unsigned
W
Ramp_Rate (515)
REAL
W
Min_Level (516)
REAL
W
Groups (517)
BIT STRING
W
Nominal_Power (518)
REAL
W
Dim_Mode (520)
BACnetDimMode
W
On_Delay_Time (521)
Unsigned
W
Off_Delay_Time (522)
Unsigned
W
Warn_Delay (523)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Time (524)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Mode (526)
BACnetAutoOffMode
W
Elapsed_Active_Time (527)
Unsigned
W
Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset (528)
BACnetDateTime
R
Table 17: Properties of the Analog Output object used to control DALI ballasts.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
219
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
W
Description
CharacterString
W
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
W
Priority_Array
BACnetPriorityArray
R
Relinquish_Default
REAL
W
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Profile_Name
CharacterString
R
Dim_Mode (520)
BACnetDimMode
W
On_Delay_Time (521)
Unsigned
W
Off_Delay_Time (522)
Unsigned
W
Warn_Delay (523)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Time (524)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Mode (526)
BACnetAutoOffMode
W
Elapsed_Active_Time (527)
Unsigned
W
Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset (528)
BACnetDateTime
R
Table 18: Properties of the Analog Output object used to control DALI groups.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
220
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
W
Description
CharacterString
W
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
W
Priority_Array
BACnetPriorityArray
R
Relinquish_Default
REAL
W
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Profile_Name
CharacterString
R
Burn_In_Time (519)
Unsigned
W
Dim_Mode (520)
BACnetDimMode
W
On_Delay_Time (521)
Unsigned
W
Off_Delay_Time (522)
Unsigned
W
Warn_Delay (523)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Time (524)
Unsigned
W
Auto_Off_Mode (526)
BACnetAutoOffMode
W
Elapsed_Active_Time (527)
Unsigned
W
Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset (528)
BACnetDateTime
R
Table 19: Properties of the Analog Output object used to control DALI channels.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The default instance number is ABCC, where “A” is 0 for the objects associated with DALI
devices and 1 for the objects associated with DALI groups, and 2 with DALI channels, “B”
is the DALI interface number (0-3) in decimal, and “CC” is the DALI device number (0063) or the DALI group address (00-15) respectively in decimal (00 for DALI channels).
Examples: Ballast 3 on channel 2 has the instance number 303, Group 5 on channel 1 has
the instance number 1205, and channel 4 has the instance number 2300.
In compatibility mode the instance number is 0x0ABBCC, where “A” is 0 for the objects
associated with DALI devices and 1 for the objects associated with DALI groups, and 2
with DALI channels, “BB” is the DALI interface number (0-3) in hex, and “CC” is the
DALI device number (0-63) or the DALI group address (0-15) respectively in hex.
Examples: Ballast 3 on channel 2 has the instance number 0x000303 (771), Group 5 on
channel 1 has the instance number 0x010205 (66053), and channel 4 has the instance
number 0x020300 (131840).
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the name of the lamp/group/channel. It can be changed via the Web-UI.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
221
LOYTEC
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is ANALOG_OUTPUT (1).
Present_Value (Read/Write)
This property, of type REAL, indicates the linearized percentage (0..100.00%) of the
device’s desired light output; 0 being off, 1 being dimmest, 100 brightest. It is used to dim
the corresponding DALI ballast, group, or channel.
Depending on the Dim_Mode property, a write to this property results in a DALI “DIRECT
ARC POWER CONTROL” command (fade) or a series of UP or DOWN commands to the
device, group or channel respectively.
Description (Read/Write)
This property can be configured via BACnet. It serves documentation purposes only.
Device_Type (Read-Only)
This property contains the DALI device type (e.g. “low voltage halogen lamp”) for objects
mapping to DALI devices, “DALI group” for objects mapping to DALI groups and “DALI
channel” for objects mapping to DALI channels.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Logical TRUE (1) if the associated DALI channel is controlled via
the button interface (see Section 3.5.2), FALSE otherwise.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
NO_OUTPUT
A lamp failure was detected (for groups and channels if
at least one lamp failure in the group/on the channel was
detected).
COMMUNICATION_FAILURE
Ballast offline (for groups and channels if at least one
ballast is offline in the group/on the channel).
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected (e.g. DALI device type specific
error, for groups and channels if at least one ballast in
the group/on the channel reports a failure)
Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 98 (percent).
Min_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 0.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
222
LOYTEC
Max_Pres_Value (Read/Write)
For objects associated to DALI lamps this property is read/write. Its maximum value is 100.
It is mapped to the DALI register MAX_LEVEL of the corresponding ballast.
For DALI groups and channels this value is always 100 and read only.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
This property has the following values:

DALI lamps: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALILampActuator/v1”

DALI groups: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIGroupActuator/v1”

DALI channels: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIChannelActuator/v1”
Power_On_Level (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 512) corresponds to the “POWER ON
LEVEL” in the DALI device. A value of NaN corresponds to MASK.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
System_Failure_Level (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 513) corresponds to the “SYSTEM
FAILURE LEVEL” in the DALI device. A value of NaN corresponds to MASK.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Fade_Time (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 514) corresponds to the “FADE TIME”
in the DALI device. It gives the time in milliseconds. The FADE TIME closest to the
written value will be used.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Ramp_Rate (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 515) corresponds to the “FADE RATE”
in the DALI device. It gives the fade rate in percent per seconds for ramping. The FADE
RATE closest to the written value will be used.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Min_Level (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 516) corresponds to “MIN LEVEL” in
the DALI device. It must be in the range 0 < Min_Level <= 100.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Groups (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 517) is a 16-bit wide BIT STRING. It
corresponds to the “GROUPS” of the DALI device. It defines the group membership of a
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
223
LOYTEC
lamp. Each bit corresponds to the group of the same index. If the bit is set, the lamp is
member of the group.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Nominal_Power (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 518) is used to specify the nominal power of a DALI
ballast. A value of 0 is used to specify AUTO. In this case the nominal power is read from
the ballast (if available).
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI lamp.
Burn_In_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 519) is used to configure the burn in time for the
channel. The burn-in mode can be activated/deactivated via the Web-UI.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Dim_Mode (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 520) is used to specify whether to use
ramping (1) or fading (0) when changing the current dim level by writing to the
Present_Value property.
In case of ramping a constant dim rate is used. Thus, the duration of the dim process
depends on the difference between start and target value.
Fading is based on a constant dim duration. Thus, the duration of the dim process does not
depend on the difference between start and target value.
On_Delay_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 521) is used to configure an on-delay time in
seconds.
Off_Delay_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 522) is used to configure an off-delay time in
seconds.
Warn_Delay (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 523) is used to configure an off-warning time in
seconds. It defines the time during which the user will be notified that the light will be
switched off shortly. During this time, the light is dimmed to 50% of the current level.
Lamps which cannot be dimmed (Min_Level = Max_Pres_Value) blink during this time.
Auto_Off_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 524) is used to configure an auto-off time in seconds.
It determines the delay after which the lamp output is switched off automatically. The timer
is started after receiving a lamp ON command via the Present_Value property
The property Auto_Off_Mode modifies the behavior of the auto-off timer.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
224
LOYTEC
Auto_Off_Mode (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 526) determines the behavior of the
auto-off timer. Possible values are:
DISABLE_ALL (0)
ENABLE_RESTART and ENABLE_BREAK not
set.
ENABLE_BREAK (1)
The auto-off-timer can be interrupted by writing to
the Present_Value.
ENABLE_RESTART (2)
The auto-off-timer is restarted whenever the
Present_Value is written.
ENABLE_RESTART_BREAK (3)
ENABLE_RESTART and ENABLE_BREAK set.
Elapsed_Active_Time (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 527) gives the accumulated time in
seconds, which the corresponding DALI lamp was switched on. For groups or channels it
gives the maximum time of all lamps in the group/channel. When writing 0 to this property
the value is reset. For groups and channels the value of all lamps in the group/channel are
reset.
Time_Of_Active_Time_Reset (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 528) give the time and date the
Elapsed_Active_Time property was last reset.
Intrinsic reporting
This object supports all properties required for intrinsic reporting. Per default only fault
alarms are enabled.
7.3.3.11 Analog Input Object – Feedback from DALI ballast, group, or channel
This object is used to give feedback on the current dim level of DALI ballasts, DALI groups,
or DALI channels (see Table 20).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
225
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
R
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
R
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Table 20: Properties of the Analog Input object providing feedback from DALI ballasts, groups, and
channels.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The instance number is equal to the instance number of the corresponding Analog Output
object (see Section 7.3.3.10).
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the value of the Object_Name of the associated Analog Output object
with the addition “Feedback”.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is ANALOG_INPUT (0).
Present_Value (Read-Only)
This property, of type REAL, indicates the linearized percentage (0..100.00%) of the DALI
device’s, group’s or channel’s current light output.
Device_Type (Read-Only)
This property contains the value “Actual Dim Level”.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Always FALSE.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
Version 2.0.1
No fault was detected.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
226
LOYTEC
NO_SENSOR
A lamp failure was detected (for groups and channels if
at least one lamp failure in the group/on the channel was
detected).
COMMUNICATION_FAILURE
Ballast offline (for groups and channels if at least one
ballast is offline in the group/on the channel).
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected (e.g. DALI device type specific
error, for groups and channels if at least one ballast in
the group/on the channel reports a failure)
Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 98 (percent).
Min_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 0.
Max_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 100.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
This property has the following values:

DALI lamps: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALILampActuatorFeedback/v1”

DALI groups: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIGroupActuatorFeedback/v1”

DALI channels: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIChannelActuatorFeedback/v1”
7.3.3.12 Multi-State Output Object – Scene Control for DALI group or channel
This object is used to control the dim level of DALI groups and DALI channels via scene
control. It has states for scene learning, recalling and clearing (see Table 21).
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
Unsigned
W
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Number_Of_States
Unsigned
R
State_Text
BACnetARRAY[N]of
CharacterString
W
Priority_Array
BACnetPriorityArray
R
Relinquish_Default
Unsigned
R
Table 21: Properties of the Multi-State Output object used for scene control of DALI groups and
channels.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
227
LOYTEC
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The instance number is equal to the instance number of the corresponding Analog Output
object (see Section 7.3.3.10).
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the value of the Object_Name of the associated Analog Output object
with the addition “Scene”.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is MULTISTATE_OUTPUT (14).
Present_Value (Read/Write)
The Present_Value property can have the following values:
GO TO SCENE X (1-16): Where X is 0-15. Results in recalling the DALI scene X by
sending the DALI “GO TO SCENE” command to the DALI group address or DALI
broadcast address, which is associated with this Multi-State Output object.
STORE SCENE X (17-32): Where X is 0-15. Results in the current values being stored as
scene X by sending the DALI “STORE THE DTR AS SCENE” command to the DALI
group address or DALI broadcast address, which is associated with this Multi-State Output
object.
REMOVE SCENE X (33-48): Where X is 0-15. Results in scene X being erased by
sending the DALI “REMOVE FROM SCENE” command to the DALI group address or
DALI broadcast address, which is associated with this Multi-State Output object.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Logical TRUE (1) if the associated DALI channel is controlled via
the button interface (see Section 3.5.2), FALSE otherwise.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property of this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
Number_Of_States (Read-Only)
This property has the value 48.
State_Text (Read/Write)
Per default this property contains the strings “GO TO SCENE X”, “STORE SCENE X”, and
“REMOVE SCENE X” respectively.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
This property has the following values:
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
228
LOYTEC

DALI groups: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIGroupSceneCtrl/v1”

DALI channels: “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIChannelSceneCtrl/v1”
7.3.3.13 Accumulator Object – Energy usage of DALI group or channel
This object is used to represent the accumulated energy usage of DALI groups and channels
(see Table 22).
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
UNSIGNED
R
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Scale
BACnetScale
R
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Max_Pres_Value
Unsigned
R
Value_Change_Time
BACnetDateTime
R
Value_Before_Change
Unsigned
R
Value_Set
Unsigned
W
Table 22: Properties of the Accumulator object representing the accumulated energy usage of DALI
groups or channels.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The instance number is equal to the instance number of the corresponding Analog Output
object (see Section 7.3.3.10).
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the value of the Object_Name of the associated Analog Output object
with the addition “Energy”.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is ACCUMULATOR (23).
Present_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property, of type UNSIGNED, indicates the accumulated energy usage in
Wh. For objects associated to DALI groups/channels this property reports the sum of the
accumulated energy usage of all ballasts in the DALI group/channel.
For calculating the energy usage the nominal power of the affected DALI lamps must be
known (see Property Nominal_Power, section 7.3.3.10). The value of this property is just a
calculated value and thus is not suitable for billing energy usage.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
229
LOYTEC
Device_Type (Read-Only)
This property contains the value “Accumulated Energy Usage”.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Always FALSE.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected.
Scale (Read-Only)
The value of this property is INTEGER 1.
Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 18 (watt-hours).
Max_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 4.294.967.295 (maximum unsigned 32-bit value).
Value_Set (Read/Write)
This property behaves as defined by the BACnet standard. Resetting the accumulator value
is possible via the Value_Set property (Value_Set is writeable, Value_Before_Change is not
writeable).
Profile_Name (Read-only)
The
value
of
this
“178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/LightEnergyAccumulator/v1”.
property
is
Intrinsic reporting
The object supports all properties required for intrinsic reporting. Per default no alarms are
enabled.
7.3.3.14 Analog Input Object – Health State of DALI group or channel
This object is used to represent the health state of DALI groups (see Table 23) or DALI
channels (see Table 24).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
230
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
R
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Table 23: Properties of the Analog Input object representing the health state of a DALI group.
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
R
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Device_Failure (529)
BIT STRING
RV
Ballast_Failure (530)
BIT STRING
RV
Lamp_Failure (531)
BIT STRING
RV
Battery_Failure (532)
BIT STRING
RV
Function_Test_Failure (533)
BIT STRING
RV
Duration_Test_Failure (534)
BIT STRING
RV
Table 24: Properties of the Analog Input object representing the health state of a DALI channel.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The default instance number is ABCC, where “A” is 3 for the objects associated with DALI
groups, and 4 with DALI channels, “B” is the DALI interface number (0-3) in decimal, and
“CC” is the DALI group address (00-15) in decimal (00 for DALI channels). Examples:
Group 5 on channel 1 has the instance number 3205, and channel 4 has the instance number
4300.
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the value of the Object_Name of the associated Analog Output object
with the addition “Status”.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
231
LOYTEC
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is ANALOG_INPUT (0).
Present_Value (Read-Only)
This property reports the percentage of failed ballasts on the corresponding group/channel.
A ballast failure is reported if either

The bus power for the related DALI channel fails,

the DALI ballast is not reachable via the DALI channel, or

the DALI ballast reports a failure (e.g. lamp failure) in its DALI status register.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Always FALSE.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 98 (percent).
Min_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 0.
Max_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 100.
Device_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 529) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device fails (offline or failure reported
via DALI status bits) the bit is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Ballast_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 530) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device reports a ballast failure the bit
is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
232
LOYTEC
Lamp_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 531) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device reports a lamp failure the bit is
set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Battery_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 532) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device reports a battery failure (selfcontained emergency lights only) the bit is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Function_Test_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 533) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device reports a function test failure
(self-contained emergency lights only) the bit is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Duration_Test_Failure (Read-Only)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 534) is a 64-bit wide BIT STRING. It
contains one bit for each ballast on the channel. If the device reports a duration test failure
(self-contained emergency lights only) the bit is set, otherwise it is cleared.
Only present if the object is associated with a DALI channel.
Intrinsic reporting
The object supports all properties required for intrinsic reporting. Per default no alarms are
enabled.
7.3.4 Sensor Objects
The L-DALI provides objects for 16 DALI sensors per channel. Each sensor is represented
by
7.3.4.1

an Analog Input object providing the lux level measured by the sensor and

an Binary Input object providing the occupancy state determined by the sensor.
Sensor Calibration
To provide a reliable measurement the light sensor needs to be calibrated. The calibration is
best performed using the Web Interface (refer to Section 4.2.11.5).
7.3.4.2
Analog Input Object – DALI lux level sensor
This object is used to represent the light sensor part of a DALI Sensor (see Table 25). There
is a maximum of 16 such objects per channel.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
233
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
R
Device_Type
CharacterString
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Min_Pres_Value
REAL
R
Max_Pres_Value
REAL
R
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Table 25: Properties of the Analog Input object representing a DALI lux level sensor.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The default instance number is 5BCC, where “B” is the DALI interface number (0-3) in
decimal, and “CC” is the DALI device number (00-15). Example: DALI sensor 4 on channel
2 has the instance number 5104.
Object_Name (Read/Write)
This property holds the name of the DALI sensor. It can be changed via the Web-UI.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is ANALOG_INPUT (0).
Present_Value (Read-Only)
This property reports the current light level reported by the sensor corrected by the
calibration function configured via the gain table (see Section 7.3.4.1).
Device_Type (Read-Only)
This property contains the type of DALI sensor (e.g. “Tridonic Sensor”).
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Always FALSE.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
Version 2.0.1
No fault was detected.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
234
LOYTEC
NO_SENSOR
No sensor assigned or some failure reported by the DALI
sensor (no light value reported).
COMMUNICATION_FAILURE
Sensor offline.
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected.
Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 37 (lux).
Min_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 0.
Max_Pres_Value (Read-Only)
The value of this property is “Infinity”.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
The value of this property is “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALILightSensor/v1”.
Intrinsic reporting
The object supports all properties required for intrinsic reporting. Per default only fault
alarms are enabled.
7.3.4.3
Binary Input Object – DALI occupancy sensor
This object is used to represent the occupancy sensor part of a DALI Sensor (see Table 26).
There is a maximum of 16 such objects per channel.
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
BACnetBinaryPV
R
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Polarity
BACnetPolarity
W
Inactive_Text
CharacterString
W
Active_Text
CharacterString
W
Debounce (535)
Unsigned
W
Unoccupied_Delay (536)
Unsigned
W
Table 26: Properties of the Binary Input object representing a DALI occupancy sensor.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The instance number is equal to the instance number of the corresponding Analog Input
object (see Section 7.3.4.2).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
235
LOYTEC
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the value of the Object_Name of the associated Analog Input object
with the addition “Occupancy”.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is BINARY_INPUT (3).
Present_Value (Read-Only)
This property reports the occupancy status. If the Polarity property is NORMAL the
occupied state corresponds to ACTIVE, while the unoccupied state corresponds to
INACTIVE.
Status_Flags (Read-Only)
Of the four flags the flags IN_ALARM, FAULT, and OUT_OF_SERVICE are linked to the
state of the corresponding properties Event_State, Reliability and Out_Of_Service as
described by the standard.
OVERRIDDEN
Always FALSE.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
NO_SENSOR
No sensor assigned or some failure reported by the DALI
sensor (no occupancy value reported).
COMMUNICATION_FAILURE
Sensor offline.
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
The value of this property is “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/DALIOccupancy Sensor/v1”.
Debounce (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 535) specifies the debouncing time in
seconds (see Section 7.2.7.1).
Unoccupied_Delay (Read/Write)
The value of this proprietary property (property ID 536) determines the delay in seconds
after which the state changes to unoccupied. The timer is armed each time the value
reported by the sensor changes from occupied to unoccupied. A value of 0 disables the
unoccupied delay.
7.3.5 Constant Light Controller
The L-DALI provides 16 constant light controller instances with built in occupancy
controller functionality for each DALI channel. Every instance is represented by a BACnet
Loop object.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.5.1
236
LOYTEC
Setpoint
The desired setpoint for the illumination level is configured via the property Setpoint.
7.3.5.2
Operating Modes
The operating mode of the constant light controller is set via the proprietary property Mode
(property ID 539). Table 27 shows the different operating modes and under which
conditions they are used:
Operating Mode
Description
REGULATOR (1)
A light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is
installed.
An occupancy sensor is installed.
CONTROL (2)
A light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
An occupancy sensor is installed.
UPDATER (3)
A DALI sensor with constant light controller functionality
shall be mapped to the BACnet network. Only the setpoint
shall be adjustable via the BACnet interface.
PRESENCE (4)
Based on occupancy the lights shall be switched on and off.
REGULATOR_NO_OCC (5)
A light sensor that measures the indoor illumination is
installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
CONTROL_NO_OCC (6)
A light sensor that measures the outdoor illumination is
installed.
No occupancy sensor is installed.
MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF (7)
Lights are switched on manually, but shall be switched off
based on occupancy.
Table 27: Constant Light Controller Operation Modes
Updater Mode
The UPDATER mode has to be selected when a DALI light/occupancy sensor with constant
light controller functionality is installed on the DALI network. In this mode no light level
computation is performed. The controller simply forwards the parameters to the DALI
constant light controller and retrieves lamp setting from the DALI light sensor.
In general, LOYTEC does not recommend using UPDATER mode. Wherever possible use
REGULATOR or CONTROL mode instead and use DALI sensors only as lux level and
occupancy information source via the corresponding sensor objects. These modes allow
improved influence of the constant light controller’s parameters via the fieldbus side.
Control Mode
The CONTROL mode has to be selected if the installed light sensor measures the outdoor
illumination. The constant light controller receives the current outdoor lux level via the
property Controlled_Variable_Value and sets the lamp level (from 0% to 100%)
accordingly (see Figure 145).
The proprietary property Step_Value (property ID 544) ensures that the light level does not
change abruptly. Per second the light level is not changed more than the percentage value
defined by this configuration property. When the light is switched on or off, Step_Value is
not taken into account.
To ensure that the setpoint is reached under all weather conditions, the control curve shown
Figure 145 has to be adjusted by calibrating the constant light controller.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
237
LOYTEC
The control mode is available in two flavors: with or without occupancy sensor. If an
occupancy sensor is installed and the room becomes unoccupied, the current light level is
saved and the light is dimmed to 0. If the room becomes occupied before the light has
reached 0, the saved light level is restored.
Regulator Mode
The REGULATOR mode has to be selected if the installed light sensor measures the indoor
brightness. The constant light controller receives the current indoor lux level via the
property Controlled_Variable_Value and adjusts the lamp level (from 0% to 100%) by
means of a fuzzy control algorithm.
When the light is switched on the control algorithm selects a lamp value which results in a
lux level close to the desired setpoint and then adjusts the lamp value in increments once
every second until the configured setpoint is reached. The size of increments is adjusted
dynamically but will never exceed the percentage value defined in the proprietary property
Step_Value (property ID 544).
To ensure that the setpoint is reached under all light conditions the parameters of the control
algorithm have to be adjusted by calibrating the constant light controller.
The regulator mode is available in two flavors: with our without occupancy sensor. If an
occupancy sensor is installed and the room becomes unoccupied, the current light level is
saved and the light is dimmed to 0. If the room becomes occupied before the light has
reached 0, the saved light level is restored.
Presence Mode
The PRESENCE mode has to be if the constant light controller shall operate as occupancy
controller. In this mode the light is switched to the value specified in the proprietary
property Occupied_Level (property ID 542) if the room is occupied and to the value
Unoccupied_Level (property ID 543) if the room is unoccupied. If Off_Delay (property ID
547) is not zero, lights will be switched off after remaining this time at Unoccupied_Level.
The light is switched to the value Occupied_Level only if the lux level is below Setpoint and
the room is occupied.
Manual-On/Auto-Off Mode
The MANUAL_ON_AUTO_OFF mode is a variation of the PRESENCE mode. However,
in this mode the constant light controller does not switch on the lights, when the room
becomes occupied. Rather, it switches the lights off when the room becomes unoccupied,
using the properties Hold_Time, Unoccupied_Level, and Off_Delay similar to PRESENCE
mode.
7.3.5.3
Occupancy Detection
The constant light controller receives the occupancy information via the proprietary
property Occupancy_Variable_Value (property ID 538). The constant light controller
changes to the occupied state when the value OCCUPIED (1) is received. When the
UNOCCUPIED (2) value is received the constant light controller remains in the occupied
state until the hold time configured in the proprietary property Hold_Time (propery ID 540)
has expired and then changes to the unoccupied state. Further, if no OCCUPIED is received
for the time configured in Hold_Time the constant light controller changes to the
unoccupied state, too.
After the light has been switched off any updates on the Occupancy_Variable_Value input
are ignored for the time specified in Ignore_Time (property ID 541).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
7.3.5.4
238
LOYTEC
Timing Parameters
To avoid that the constant light controller switches the light on and off repeatedly if the
measured lux value is near the setpoint, a hysteresis can be configured. The proprietary
property Off_Hysteresis (property ID 546) defines the hysteresis for switching off the lamp
and the proprietary property On_Hysteresis (property ID 545) defines the hysteresis for
switching on the lamp. In addition a delay can be configured before the lamp is switched on
(On_Delay) or off (Off_Delay). Figure 157 illustrates these configuration parameters.
Figure 157: Constant Light Controller Timing.
7.3.5.5
Interaction with other BACnet Objects
The Loop Object allows automatically retrieving its input values from and writing its output
values to other BACnet server objects. To reference the property and server object it
provides properties of type BACnetObjectPropertyReference. Specifically these are:

Manipulated_Variable_Reference: Writing Present_Value (Constant Light Controller
output, e.g. to Analog Output controlling DALI lights, see Section 7.3.3.10).

Controlled_Variable_Reference: Reading lux level input (e.g. from DALI lux level
sensor, see Section 7.3.4.2).

Setpoint_Reference: Reading setpoint value.

Occupancy_Variable_Reference (property ID 537): Reading occupancy input (e.g.
from DALI occupancy sensor, see Section 7.3.4.3).
Note, that the referenced server object must be local. If remote server objects shall be
referenced client maps can be configured using a CSV-File (see Section 7.3.7).
7.3.5.6
Loop Object – Constant Light Controller application
This object is used to represent a constant light controller instance (see Table 28). There are
up to 16 instances per DALI channel available.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
239
LOYTEC
Property Identifier
Property Datatype
Conformance Code
Object_Identifier
BACnetObjectIdentifier
R
Object_Name
CharacterString
R
Object_Type
BACnetObjectType
R
Present_Value
REAL
R
Description
CharacterString
W
Status_Flags
BACnetStatusFlags
R
Event_State
BACnetEventState
R
Reliability
BACnetReliability
R
Out_Of_Service
BOOLEAN
W
Output_Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Manipulated_Variable_Reference
BACnetObjectPropertyReference
W
Controlled_Variable_Reference
BACnetObjectPropertyReference
W
Controlled_Variable_Value
REAL
W
Controlled_Variable_Units
BACnetEngineeringUnits
R
Setpoint_Reference
BACnetSetpointReference
W
Setpoint
REAL
W
Action
BACnetAction
R
Priority_For_Writing
Unsigned
W
COV_Increment
REAL
W
Occupancy_Variable_Reference (537)
BACnetObjectPropertyReference
W
Occupancy_Variable_Value (538)
BOOLEAN
W
Mode (539)
Unsigned
W
Hold_Time (540)
Unsigned
W
Ignore_Time (541)
Unsigned
W
Occupied_Level (542)
REAL
W
Unoccupied_Level (543)
REAL
W
Step_Value (544)
REAL
W
On_Hysteresis (545)
REAL
W
Off_Hysteresis (546)
REAL
W
Off_Delay (547)
Unsigned
W
On_Delay (548)
Unsigned
W
Table 28: Properties of the Loop object representing a Constant Light Controller Application.
Object_Identifier (Read-Only)
The default instance number is BCC, where “B” is the DALI interface number (0-3) in
decimal, and “CC” is the Constant Light Controller instance on the channel (00-15).
Object_Name (Read-Only)
This property holds the name of the constant light controller.
Object_Type (Read-Only)
The value of this property is LOOP (12).
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
240
LOYTEC
Present_Value (Read-Only)
This property, of type REAL, indicates the linearized percentage (0..100.00%) of the
constant light controller output.
Description (Read/Write)
This property can be configured via BACnet. It serves documentation purposes only.
Reliability (Read-Only)
The Reliability property for this object type may have any of the following values:
NO_FAULT_DETECTED
No fault was detected.
OPEN_LOOP
The sensor value does not change when the output is
controlled (CONTROL mode only).
COMMUNICATION_FAILURE
Communication with sensor or light output not working.
UNRELIABLE_OTHER
Other failure detected.
Output_Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 98 (percent).
Manipulated_Variable_Reference (Read/Write)
Specifies the object and property the value of the Present_Value property is written to.
Controlled_Variable_Reference (Read/Write)
Specifies the object and property the light sensor value is read from.
Controlled_Variable_Value (Read/Write)
This property holds the
Controlled_Variable_Reference.
current
light
sensor
value
as
read
from
Controlled_Variable_Units (Read-Only)
The value of this property is 37 (lux).
Setpoint_Reference (Read/Write)
Specifies the object and property the setpoint for the constant light controller algorithm is
read from.
Setpoint (Read/Write)
This property holds the setpoint for the constant light controller algorithm.
Action (Read-Only)
The value of this property is DIRECT.
Profile_Name (Read-only)
The value of this property is “178-http://www.loytec.com/xsd/ConstantLightController/v1”.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
241
LOYTEC
Occupancy_Variable_Reference (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 537) specifies the object and property the occupancy
sensor value is read from.
Occupancy_Variable_Value (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 538) holds the current occupancy sensor value as
read from Occupancy_Variable_Reference.
Mode (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 539) holds the constant light controller operating
mode (see Section 7.3.5.2).
Hold_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 540) holds the hold time for the occupancy state in
seconds. When the OCCUPIED (1) value is received via Occupancy_Variable_Value the
constant light controller remains in the occupied state until the hold time has expired and
then changes to the unoccupied state.
Ignore_Time (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 541) holds the occupancy ignore time after switching
off the light in seconds.
Occupied_Level (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 542) holds the output levels adopted in the presence
modes in occupied state.
Unoccupied_Level (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 543) holds the output levels adopted in the presence
modes in unoccupied state.
Step_Value (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 544) holds the step value for constant light controller
algorithm in percent. It defines the maximum step size that the constant light controller will
take to approach the target illumination. Per second the light level is not changed more than
the percentage value defined by this configuration property.
On_Hysteresis (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 545) holds the constant light controller algorithm
hysteresis for switching lights on (percent).
The hysteresis is used in CONTROL or REGULATOR mode.
Off_Hysteresis (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 546) holds the constant light controller algorithm
hysteresis for switching lights off (percent).
The hysteresis is used in CONTROL or REGULATOR mode.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
242
LOYTEC
Off_Delay (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 547) holds the constant light controller off delay in
seconds.
On_Delay (Read/Write)
This proprietary property (property ID 548) holds the constant light controller on delay in
seconds.
7.3.6 Alarming, Scheduling and Trending Objects (AST)
The BACnet interface provides the following AST objects:

4 Notification Class objects per channel (Alarming)

8 Calendar objects

16 Scheduler objects per channel

16 Trendlog object per channel
7.3.7 Client Mapping CSV File
Client functionality for the BACnet server objects can be defined by so-called client
mappings. These mappings basically specify whether present value properties shall be
written to or polled from the BACnet network, and what the destination address and objects
are. These definitions can be downloaded as a CSV file onto the device using FTP.
The CSV file must be named ‘bacclnt.csv’ and stored in the directory ‘/var/lib/bacnet’ on
the device. The file is read when the device boots. If any errors occur they are reported in
‘/tmp/bacclnt.err’.
The column format is shown in Table 29. Lines beginning with a hash (‘#’) sign are
comment lines. The example values in Table 29 setup a client mapping named “Lamp Room
302”, which writes (mapping type 2) the present value of the local object AI,4 to the remote
object AO,1 on the device with the instance number 17801.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
243
LOYTEC
Column
Field
Example
Description
A
Description
Lamp Room 302
User-defined description of this client mapping. Can be
left empty. Don’t use commas or semi-colons in the
text!
B
Local Object-Type
AI
The BACnet object type of the local server object (AI,
AO, AV, BI, BO, BV, MI, MO, MV)
C
Local Object
Instance Number
4
The object instance number of the above object.
D
Remote Device
Instance
17801
The device object instance number of the remote
BACnet device
E
Remote ObjectType
AO
The BACnet object type of the remote server object (AI,
AO, AV, BI, BO, BV, MI, MO, MV)
F
Remote Object
Instance Number
1
The object instance number of the above object.
G
Map Type
2
Defines the type of the mapping: 0=Poll, 1=COV,
2=Write
H
Interval/
8
Defines the poll interval in seconds for poll mappings
and the COV lifetime in seconds for COV mappings.
For write mappings this defines the write priority
(1..16). Omit this field or set it to ‘-1’ to write w/o
priority.
Priority
Table 29: CSV Columns of the BACnet Client Mappings File.
7.3.8 EDE Export of BACnet Objects
The BACnet server object configuration of the device is accessible as a set of CSV files
following the EDE format convention. They can be downloaded via FTP from the directory
‘/data/ede’ on the device. The files are

ldali.csv: This is the main EDE sheet with the list of BACnet objects.

ldali-states.csv: This is the state text sheet. For each state text reference in the main
sheet, a line contains the state texts for this multi-state object.

ldali-types.csv: This is the object types text sheet. The file contains a line for each
object type number. Note, that lines for standard object types can be omitted.

ldali-units.csv: This is the unit text sheet. The file contains a line for each engineering
unit enumerator value. Note that lines for standard units can be omitted.
7.4 DALI Interface
On it’s up to four DALI interfaces the L-DALI acts as a DALI master controller. DALI
stands for “Digitally Addressable Lighting Interface” and is the name commonly used for
the communication protocol defined in the international standard IEC 60929 Annex E and
the newer IEC 62386. For further information regarding DALI please refer to
http://www.dali-ag.org/.
7.4.1 Multi-Master Operation
The L-DALI is capable of multi-master operation. That is, it can be installed in parallel to
one or more other DALI master controllers on the same DALI network. However, all other
DALI master controllers must be multi-master capable in order to render a working DALI
system. Other DALI masters may be DALI multi-sensors with built in constant light or
occupancy controller functionality, DALI switches, buttons, and touch panels, as well as
other DALI controllers.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
244
LOYTEC
7.4.2 DALI Device Types
The L-DALI distinguishes between the following DALI device types:
DALI Ballasts
DALI ballasts are specified in IEC 60929 and the newer IEC 62386. The L-DALI supports
IEC 62386 parts 101 and 102 and the DALI device types specified in parts 201 to 208
(Edition 1 of all parts).
In addition the L-DALI support some vendor specific features (e.g. reading serial number,
determining nominal power) for OSRAM and Tridonic ballasts.
DALI Sensors
Currently the DALI standard does not specify DALI sensors. Thus, any “DALI sensors”
available use proprietary extensions of the DALI protocol. Nevertheless, the L-DALI
supports the following DALI multi-sensors1:

Tridonic Msensor (D104 or higher, see Section 7.4.4.1)

SVEA LA-11

Helvar Digidim 312

OSRAM DALI Professional Sensorcoupler

Philips OccuSwitch DALI (occupancy only, L-DALI firmware version 2.2 and up)
Typically these devices offer occupancy and light level sensor functionality. In addition they
usually also offer occupancy and constant light controller functionality. The L-DALI allows
utilizing the sensor functionality. If it is intended to also use the controller functionality the
installation software of the devices vendor must be used to install and parameterize the
device as this is not supported by the L-DALI.
If you need support for a DALI sensor not listed above please contact LOYTEC.
Other DALI devices
Different other DALI devices like “DALI switches”, “DALI buttons”, or “DALI touch
panels” are proprietary extensions of the DALI protocol and therefore currently not
supported by the L-DALI. That is, they cannot be commissioned or parameterized using the
L-DALI and they are not mapped to LonMark objects like DALI ballasts or DALI sensors.
However, such device may be operated in a network controlled by the L-DALI. In this case
they must be commissioned and parameterized using the installation software of the
device’s vendor.
1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH assumes no responsibility for any errors contained in this
list. LOYTEC makes no representation and offers no warranty of any kind regarding any of
the third-party components mentioned in this list. These components are suggested only as
examples of usable devices. The use of these components or other alternatives is at the
customer’s sole discretion.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
245
LOYTEC
7.4.3 DALI Channel Bridging
The L-DALI allow connecting two or more physical DALI channels to one virtual DALI
channel. This operation mode is called DALI bridging. It is used if a DALI group shall
contain more than 64 ballasts, that is, more ballasts than it is possible to accommodate on
one DALI channel.
In the DALI bridging mode the L-DALI will forward any dim commands addressed to DALI
groups and any DALI broadcasts received on one channel to the other bridged channels.
Note:
DALI bridging is only required if the large group shall be controlled by other DALI
masters like DALI switches, buttons, or touch panels. If no such devices are used, it is
recommended to use fan-out binding to the group’s network variables (one on each
CEA-709 node representing a DALI channel) instead of the bridging mode.
7.4.4 Special Use Cases
7.4.4.1
Using the Tridonic Msensor
Important:
Use Msensor versions marked D104 or higher!
The Tridonic Msensor comes with a built in constant light controller application, which
cannot be disabled. To use it as DALI light level and occupancy sensor only all sensors must
be configured to control group 14 by setting the dial on back of device to position “F” (see
Figure 158). On this channel group 14 and 15 must not be used for any other purposes
anymore (do not configure ballasts to be group member in group 14 or 15).
Important:
In any case do not set the dial to position “0” as this will make the sensor send
broadcasts!
Figure 158: Set Msensor group dial to position ‘F’.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
246
LOYTEC
8 Network Media
8.1 FT (LDALI-3E10X only)
The L-DALI FT port is fully compatible to the parameters specified by LONMARK for this
channel. FT ports can also be used on Link Power (LP-10) channels. However, the L-DALI
does not provide the power supply for Link Power channels.
When using the Free Topology Segment feature of the FT, only one termination (Figure
159) is required and can be placed anywhere on the free topology segment. Instead of
building the termination, one can order the L-Term module (LT-33) from LOYTEC, which
can be used to properly terminate the bus.
100 µF, 50V
+
52,3 
+
100 µF, 50V
Figure 159: FT Free Topology Termination
In a double terminated bus topology, two terminations are required (Figure 160). These
terminations need to be placed at each end of the bus. Here, also L-Term modules can be
used at either end.
100 µF, 50V
100 µF, 50V
+
+
105 
105 
+
+
100 µF, 50V
100 µF, 50V
Figure 160: Termination in an FT Bus Topology
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
247
LOYTEC
8.2 MS/TP (LDALI-ME20X only)
MS/TP is an RS-485 protocol and usually needs three wires (negative, positive, and
reference). Polarity must be connected correctly. When using 2-wire MS/TP, earth ground
must be connected to the negative terminal of the power supply. Never connect the positive
terminal of the power supply to earth ground! See Section 3.8.1 for wiring instructions.
Each MS/TP network segment must be properly terminated. Use an LT-04 network
terminator connected at each of the two ends of the segment media.
The RS-485 transceiver of the device represents a full-load on the RS-485 bus.
Consequently, a minimum of 31 devices are supported on the MS/TP channel. More devices
may be possible, if they represent half-load or quarter-load. Please consult the third-party
documentation. If more MS/TP devices need to be connected, use an RS-485 repeater to
separate them electrically.
Logically, the MS/TP bus supports up to 255 devices. Each MS/TP device must be assigned
a unique MAC address. Up to 127 MS/TP masters can be connected. Make sure, that the
Max_Master setting includes the highest MS/TP master MAC address.
For operation of some slower devices on the MS/TP network it is recommended to set the
following properties of the device object to fine-tune communication on the network:
Version 2.0.1

APDU_Timeout = 60000 (1 min).

APDU_Segement_Timeout = 40000 (40 sec).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
248
LOYTEC
9 L-DALI Firmware Update
The L-DALI firmware supports remote upgrade over the network and the serial console.
To guarantee that the L-DALI is not destroyed due to a failed firmware update, the L-DALI
firmware consists of two images:
L-DALI fallback image,
L-DALI primary image.
The L-DALI fallback image cannot be changed. Thus, if the update of the primary image
fails or the image is destroyed by some other means, the fallback image is booted and allows
reinstalling a valid primary image.
When the L-DALI boots up with the fallback image, the CEA-709 port LED and the
STATUS LED are flashing red.
9.1 Firmware Update via the L-DALI Configurator (LDALI-3E10X
only)
The L-DALI primary image can be updated using the L-DALI Configurator. For this
purpose, it is recommended to have the L-DALI connected to the Ethernet and to have a
valid IP configuration (see Section 4.2.4). The L-DALI Configurator must be installed (see
Section 6.1.1).
To Update the Firmware using the L-DALI Configurator
Version 2.0.1
1.
Start the L-DALI Configurator from the Windows Start menu: Start  Programs 
LOYTEC L-DALI Configurator  L-DALI Configurator.
2.
Select the menu: Connection  Connect via FTP. This opens the FTP connection
dialog as shown in Figure 161.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
249
LOYTEC
Figure 161: FTP connection dialog.
Note:
3.
In the FTP connection dialog, enter the IP address of the L-DALI as well as the FTP
user name and password. The default user name and password are ‘admin’ and
‘loytec4u’. This can be changed via the Web interface (see Section 4.1) and reset via
the console UI (see Section 10.2.2).
4.
Click on Connect.
Alternatively, a connection via LNS can be established. However, mind that a firmware
update via an FT-10 channel may take considerably longer.
5.
Select the menu: Firmware  Update …
6.
This opens the Firmware Update dialog as shown in Figure 162. Click on the button
“…” and select the firmware image (“ldali_10x_2_0_0.dl”).
Figure 162: Firmware Update dialog of the LINX-100/200 Configurator.
7.
Click on Start Download.
8.
Observe the download progress. When the download is complete, the dialog shown in
Figure 163 appears.
Figure 163: FTP download success dialog.
9.
Version 2.0.1
Click OK.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
250
LOYTEC
10. In the Firmware Update dialog, click Close.
11. The device’s firmware has now been successfully upgraded.
9.2
Firmware Update via FTP
The L-DALI primary image can be updated using any FTP client. For this purpose, the
L-DALI must be connected to the Ethernet and must have a valid IP configuration (see
Section 2.2).
The following instructions explain how to update the firmware using the command line FTP
client of Windows. However, the process can be accomplished using any other FTP client.
1.
Start the command shell (Start->Run, enter “cmd” in the field “Open”, press OK).
2.
Change to the directory containing the firmware image (e.g. “ldali_20x_2_2.dl”). Use
the command “cd”.
3.
Start the ftp client. Type “ftp <ip-addr>”, where <ip-addr> is the IP address of
the L-DALI.
4.
When asked for the user enter “admin”.
5.
When asked for the password enter the password for the “admin” user. The default
password is “loytec4u”.
6.
Switch to binary mode by entering “binary”.
7.
Upload the firmware image to the directory “dev” with the command “put
ldali_20x_2_2.dl dev/ldali_20x_primary.dl” (LDALI-ME20X) or
“put ldali_10x_2_2.dl dev/ldali_10x_primary.dl” (LDALI-3E10X).
8.
After the firmware image has been successfully uploaded, the L-DALI automatically
reboots.
9.
Leave the ftp client with the command “quit”.
The complete output should look like shown in Figure 164.
C:\temp>ftp 192.168.1.254
Connected to 192.168.1.254.
220 RTEMS FTP server (Version 1.1-JWJ) ready.
User (192.168.1.254none)): admin
331 User name okay, need password.
Password:
230 User logged in.
ftp> binary
200 Type set to I.
ftp> put ldali_20x_2_2.dl dev/ldali_20x_primary.dl
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection.
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 64d Bytes sent in 7,63seconds 88,83KB/s
ftp> quit
Figure 164: Typical output of the command line FTP client during a firmware update.
9.3 Firmware Update via the Console
To download the firmware via the console interface, the L-DALI must be connected to the
RS-232 port of a PC via its console interface as described in Section 10.2.1. You will need
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
251
LOYTEC
the LOYTEC serial upgrade tool (LSU Tool), which can be downloaded from our homepage
at www.loytec.com.
Please make sure that the L-DALI console shows the main menu otherwise navigate to the
main menu or simply reset the L-DALI.
To Upgrade via the Console
1.
Double click on the *.dlc file that comes with the new firmware package. This should
start the LSU Tool and load the firmware image referenced in the dlc file. Please note
that the dlc file and the dl file must be stored in the same folder. The start window of
the LSU tool is shown in Figure 165.
Figure 165: LSU Serial Upgrade Tool in Idle Mode
2.
Version 2.0.1
If the L-DALI is not connected to COM1 you can change the port to COM2, COM3, or
COM4. Make sure that the product shown under “Product” matches the device you are
upgrading. Press Download to start the download. A progress bar as shown in Figure
166 can be seen.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
252
LOYTEC
Figure 166: Progress Bar during Firmware Download.
3.
If the upgrade is successful, the following window appears (Figure 167).
Figure 167: Successful Firmware Upgrade
4.
Version 2.0.1
Double check that the new firmware is executed by selecting ‘1’ and pressing Enter in
the console window. This will bring up the device information which shows the current
firmware version.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
253
LOYTEC
10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Technical Support
LOYTEC offers free telephone and E-Mail support for our L-DALI product series. If none
of the above descriptions solves your specific problem please contact us at the following
address:
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
Blumengasse 35
A-1170 Vienna
Austria / Europe
email :
web :
tel :
fax :
[email protected]
http://www.loytec.com
+43/1/4020805-100
+43/1/4020805-99
or
LOYTEC Americas Inc.
11258 Goodnight Lane
Suite 101
Dallas, Texas 75229
USA
Email:
web:
tel:
fax:
[email protected]
http://www.loytec-americas.com
+1/512/402 5319
+1/972/243 6886
10.2 Statistics on the Console
10.2.1 Connecting to the Console
Use a PC terminal program with the communication settings set to 38,400 bps / 8 data bits /
no parity / 1 stop bit / no handshake. To connect COM1 of the PC to the Console on the
device, use a standard null-modem cable with full handshaking. Power up the device or
press Return if the device is already running. The menu shown in Figure 168 should appear
on the terminal.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
254
LOYTEC
Device Main Menu
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Show device information
Serial firmware upgrade
System configuration
DALI maintenance
IP configuration
CEA-709 configuration
Reset configuration (factory defaults)
Device statistics
[a] Data Points
[0] Reset device
Please choose:
Figure 168: Console Main Menu.
10.2.2 Reset configuration (load factory defaults)
Select item ‘8’ in the console main menu. This menu item allows resetting the device into
its factory default state. The menu appears as shown in Figure 169.
Reset Configuration Menu
[1] Reset everything to factory defaults
[3] Reset all passwords
[4] Clear data point configuration
[q] Quit
Please choose:
Figure 169: Reset to Factory Defaults Menu.
Select option ‘1’ to reset the entire device to factory defaults (including error log,
configuration files, passwords etc.). Select option ‘3’ to reset all passwords (Web interface,
FTP server etc.) to factory defaults.
Select option ‘4’ to clear all configured data points, parameters and the DALI configuration.
The L-DALI must be rebooted to let the changes take effect.
10.2.3 Device Statistics Menu
Select ‘9’ from the device main menu to get to the device statistics menu. This menu holds
relevant information regarding the device statistics of the device. This section describes
those statistics, which are not available on the Web UI. The device statistics menu is shown
in Figure 170. Use this menu only for debugging purposes. There is no need to access this
menu if the network is running smoothly.
Statistics Menu
[2]
[4]
[5]
[8]
[9]
Show
Show
Show
Show
Show
CEA-709 application statistics
IP statistics
OPC statistics
DPAL statistics
Reg DPAL statistics
[q] Quit
Please choose:
Figure 170: Device Statistics Menu on the Console.
10.2.3.1 IP statistics
A sample console output is shown in Figure 171.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
255
LOYTEC
*********** INTERFACE STATISTICS ************
***** lo0 *****
Address:127.0.0.1
Flags: Up Loopback Running Multicast
Send queue limit:50 length:0 Dropped:0
***** eth0 *****
Address:192.168.0.2
Broadcast Address:192.168.0.255
Flags: Up Broadcast Running Simplex Multicast
Send queue limit:50 length:0 Dropped:0
Network Driver Stats for CS8900 :
rx ready len 50
rx loaded len 0
rx packets 931
tx packets 165
rx bytes 78480
tx bytes 13627
rx interrupts 931
tx interrupts 165
rx dropped 0
rx no mbuf 0
rx no custers 0 rx oversize errors 0
rx crc errors 0
rx runt errors 0
rx missed errors 0
tx ok 165
tx collisions 0
tx bid errors 0
tx wait for rdy4tx 0
tx rdy4tx 0
tx underrun errors 0
tx dropped 2
tx resends 0
int swint req 2094
int swint res 2094
int lockup 0
interrupts 3189
************ MBUF STATISTICS ************
mbufs: 512 clusters: 64 free: 14
drops: 0
waits: 0 drains: 0
free:461
data:51
header:0
pcb:0
rtable:0
htable:0
soname:0
soopts:0
ftable:0
ifaddr:0
control:0
oobdata:0
socket:0
atable:0
rights:0
************ IP Statistics ************
total packets received
922
datagrams delivered to upper level
922
total ip packets generated here
158
Destination
Gateway/Mask/Hw Flags
Refs
Use Expire
Interface
default
192.168.0.1
UGS
6
0
0 eth0
62.178.55.77 192.168.0.1
UGH
0
1 3606 eth0
62.178.95.96 192.168.0.1
UGH
0
1 3606 eth0
81.109.145.243 192.168.0.1
UGH
0
1 3606 eth0
81.109.251.36 192.168.0.1
UGH
0
1 3606 eth0
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
UH
0
0
0 lo0
130.140.10.21 192.168.0.1
UGH
1
6
0 eth0
192.168.0.0
255.255.255.0
U
0
0
3 eth0
192.168.0.1
00:04:5A:26:96:1F UHL
7
0 1722 eth0
213.18.80.166 192.168.0.1
UGH
1
148
0 eth0
************ TCP Statistics ************
************ UDP Statistics ************
total input packets
924
total output packets
158
************ ICMP Statistics ************
Figure 171: IP Statistics.
The IP statistics menu has the additional feature of displaying any IP address conflicts. If
the device’s IP address conflicts with another host on the network, the banner shown in
Figure 172 is displayed.
WARNING: Conflicting IP address detected!
IP address 10.125.123.95 also used by device with MAC address
00 04 5A CC 10 41!
Clear IP conflict history (y/n):
Figure 172: IP Address Conflict.
As useful information, the MAC address of the conflicting host is shown. If the information
about this conflict shall be cleared, enter ‘y’. If ‘n’ is selected, the conflict will show up
again the next time this menu is entered.
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
256
LOYTEC
10.3 DALI Protocol Analyzer
A DALI protocol analyzer is available via the console interface and via telnet.
10.3.1 Starting DALI PA via Console
Proceed as follows to start the DALI protocol analyzer via the console UI:
1.
Connect to serial interface of L-DALI as described in Section 2.2.1.
2.
In the console main menu select menu item “[4] DALI maintenance”. The resulting
menu is shown in Figure 173.
DALI Maintenance Menu
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
DALI
DALI
DALI
DALI
DALI
DALI
[q]
Quit
channel
configuration
statistics
analyzer
monitor
communication
: 1
Please choose:
Figure 173: DALI Maintenance Menu.
3.
Use menu item “[1] DALI channel” to select the channel to start the DALI protocol
analyzer on.
4.
Use menu item “[4] DALI analyzer” to start the DALI analyzer.
5.
When asked to enter a filter mask, press RETURN or enter a filter mask as described in
Table 30.
Filter flag
Description
0x00000001
Do not show frames sent by other DALI masters.
0x00000002
Do not show frames sent by the L-DALI
0x00000004
Show frames with frame errors.
0x00000008
Only show DALI dim commands.
Table 30: DALI Protocol Analyzer Filter Flags.
6.
Press any key to stop the DALI analyzer again.
10.3.2 Starting DALI PA via Telnet
Proceed as follows to start the DALI protocol analyzer via the telnet interface:
1.
Connect to your L-DALI using a telnet client and log in with the “admin” user. The
login credentials are identical to the ones of the Web Interface (see Section 4.1).
2.
Start the DALI protocol analyzer using the command
dali_pa <channel> [filter]
where <channel> gives the DALI channel (1-4), which has to be analyzed and [filter] is
an optional filter mask as described in Table 30.
3.
Version 2.0.1
Press any key to stop the DALI analyzer again.
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
257
LOYTEC
10.3.3 DALI PA Information
Typical output from the DALI protocol analyzer looks like this:
11:08:05.284 45.00TE -> REQ
s03 QUERY STATUS
Each line contains the following information:

Timestamp (Example: “11:08:05.284”): Local time on the device when the frame was
received (end of frame).

Settling time (Example: “45.00TE”): Settling time between this and the previous frame
in Te (1 Te = 416.67 μs). The maximum value shown is “99TE”.

Direction (Example: “->”): Frames sent by the L-DALI are marked by “->”, while
frames received are marked by “<-“.

Frame type (Example: “REQ”): Type of DALI frame. Some possible frame types are
shown in Table 31.
Frame type
Description
REQ
DALI request
CMD
DALI command
RESP
DALI response
ECMD
DALI EFF command
EREQ
DALI EFF request
EFF
DALI EFF event
EVNT
DALI event (Philips)
???
Unknown type
Table 31: DALI frame types.


Version 2.0.1
Destination address (Example: “s03”): Destination address of the frame. Possible
address types are:
o
sXX: DALI short address, where XX is the short address (00-63).
o
gXX: DALI group address, where XX is the group number (00-15).
o
b*: DALI broadcast address.
Message type & data (Example: “QUERY STATUS”): Shows the DALI message type
and the corresponding data (argument).
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
258
LOYTEC
11 Specifications
11.1 L-DALI
11.1.1 Physical Specifications
Operating Voltage
12-35 VDC or 12-24 VAC ±10%
Power Consumption
typ. 3 W
In rush current
up to 950 mA @ 24 VAC
Operating Temperature (ambient)
0C to + 50C
Storage Temperature
10C to +85C
Humidity (non condensing) operating
10 to 90% RH @ 50C
Humidity (non condensing) storage
10 to 90% RH @ 50C
Enclosure
Installation enclosure 9 TE, DIN 43 880
Environmental Protection
IP 40 (enclosure); IP 20 (screw terminals)
Installation
DIN rail mounting (EN 50 022) or wall
mounting
11.1.2 Resource Limits (LDALI-3E10X)
Version 2.0.1
LONMARK calendar objects
1 (10 calendar patterns) for each DALI channel
LONMARK scheduler objects
16 for each DALI channel
Trend objects
25 for each DALI channel
Trended data points
64 for each DALI channel
Total aggregated trend log size
2MB
E-Mail templates
100
Math objects
100
Alarm logs
10
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
L-DALI User’s Manual
259
LOYTEC
12 Revision History
Date
Version
Author
Description
07-05-2010
1.0
AD
Initial revision V1.0
15-06-2010
1.0.1
JB
Minor corrections
08-11-2010
1.1
JB
Updated for L-DALI firmware 2.1 and Configurator 1.1
16-09-2011
2.0
JB
Cover LDALI-ME20X (BACnet) firmware 2.2
Minor improvements related to LDALI-3E10X documentation
14-11-2011
2.0.1
JB
Minor corrections and improvements
Version 2.0.1
LOYTEC electronics GmbH
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement